Quarterlytics / Communication Services / Department Stores / Myer Holdings Ltd / FY2012 Annual Report

Myer Holdings Ltd
Annual Report 2012

MYR · ASX Communication Services
Claim this profile
Ticker MYR
Exchange ASX
Sector Communication Services
Industry Department Stores
Employees 10,000+
← All annual reports
FY2012 Annual Report · Myer Holdings Ltd
Loading PDF…
annual report 2012

67 stores 
in prime 
locations

first 
choice
for fashion, 
cosmetics and 
the home

contents

About Myer • 02

2012 Financial Results • 04

From the Chairman • 06

From the CEO • 08

Review of Operations • 10

Sustainability • 18

Board of Directors • 22

Management Team • 24

Corporate Governance  
Statement • 26

Directors’ Report • 39

Remuneration Report • 44

Financial Report • 60

Auditor’s Report • 112

Shareholder Information • 115

Corporate Directory  
inside back cover

Annual General Meeting
The 2012 Annual General Meeting of  
Myer Holdings Limited will be held at  
Mural Hall, Level 6, Myer Melbourne,  
Bourke Street Mall, Melbourne, Victoria  
on Friday, 7 December 2012 at 11am.

Myer Holdings Limited    ABN 14 119 085 602

M
y
e
r

A
N
N
u

A
L

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

0
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
about myer

Myer is Australia’s largest department store  
group, synonymous with style and fashion 
for over 100 years. 

Our focus on providing inspiration to everyone includes 
our  customers,  our  12,500  team  members,  our  54,000 
shareholders, our 1,200 suppliers globally and the many 
communities that we engage with our strong brand.

Myer is a significant employer and has a long history of 
philanthropy and local community engagement.

The  store  network  includes  a  footprint  of  67  stores  in 
prime retail locations across Australia.

The  Myer  merchandise  offer  includes  11  core  product 
categories: Womenswear; Menswear; Miss Shop (Youth); 
Childrenswear; Intimate apparel; Beauty, fragrance and 
cosmetics; Homewares; Electrical goods; Toys; Footwear, 
handbags and accessories; and General merchandise.

Myer’s five-point strategic plan
Myer’s strategy is comprised of five key elements: 
1.  Optimise our store network
2.  Enhance our merchandise offer
3.  Improve customer service and efficiency
4.  Strengthen our loyalty offer 
5.  Build a leading omni-channel offer.

Optimise our store network
We  have  a  strong  network  of  67  stores  across  the 
country,  and  a  strategy  to  optimise  the  store  network 
with  a  pipeline  of  new  stores,  replacement  stores,  
and refurbishments. 

We  continue  our  focus  on  maximising  returns  per 
square metre.

We  recognise  that  our  customers  want  to  be  able  to 
touch and feel products in store, as well as engage with 
knowledgeable  and  helpful  staff.  Our  store  network  is 
integral to delivering a seamless customer experience 
across all digital and retail touch points.

Enhance our merchandise offer
We  have  a  focus  on  inspiring  and  delighting  our 
customers  with  newness  and  fashionability  across 
all  categories.  We  want  to  be  the  first  choice  when 
shopping for fashion, cosmetics and the home. 

The Myer brand offering includes well-known national 
brands, Australian and international designers, as well as 
57 brands which are owned and distributed exclusively 
by Myer, known as ‘Myer Exclusive Brands’. 

Our  vertically-integrated  Myer  Exclusive  Brand  model 
of managing the design, development and sourcing of 
wanted brands provides us with significant control and 
flexibility. This  model,  together  with  our  two  sourcing 
offices  in  Asia,  our  world-class  supply  chain,  and 
updated IT and merchandise systems, delivers speed to 
market, and effective inventory control, and gives us a 
key competitive advantage.

We also seek to acquire wanted brands where it makes 
commercial sense and where the addition of the brand 
will further strengthen our merchandise offer.

Improve customer service and efficiency
We have a focus on improving the customer experience 
that  incorporates  a  number  of  service  and  efficiency 
initiatives.  Service  initiatives  include  investment  in  
high service categories at high service times, additional 
training  and  selling  skills  programs,  and  enhanced 
reward and recognition.

Efficiency initiatives include improving staff availability 
at sales points, ensuring more efficient delivery of stock 
to  the  shop  floor,  and  reducing  the  level  of  theft  and 
fraud in our stores.

Strengthen our loyalty offer
The  Myer  one  loyalty  program  is  one  of  Australia’s 
leading loyalty programs, with 4.7 million members and 
over 6 million cards in circulation.

Members receive two Shopping Credits for every dollar 
spent  in  Myer  stores,  with  a  $20  Myer  one  rewards 
gift  card  for  every  2,000  Shopping  Credits.  On  average, 
customers spend 3.8 times the value of their rewards card  
on redemption. 

With  the  growth  in  loyalty  programs  in  Australia,  we 
are  focused  on  strengthening  the  Myer  one  loyalty 
program with a number of initiatives to ensure that the 
program continues to be leading edge.

Sales using the Myer one card represent approximately 
70  percent  of  total  sales.  The  data  from  the  program 
provide  insights  into  customer  shopping  preferences 
and  assist  in  the  evaluation  of  the  success  of  stores, 
brands, space, marketing, products and services mix.

rapidly  changing 

Build a leading omni-channel offer
In  a 
technology  environment, 
customers’  shopping  preferences  continue  to  evolve. 
We  are  focused  on  delivering  a  seamless  experience 
for  our  customers,  whether  in  store,  online,  or  on 
mobile  devices.  The  right  combination  of  physical 
stores  and  technology,  together  with  the  right  offer 
and fast, efficient fulfilment is critical to our success in  
omni-channel retailing.

We are capitalising on our strong brand, depth of offer, 
store network and popular loyalty program in order to 
become Australia’s leading omni-channel retailer.

increasingly 

We 
integrate  our  marketing,  balancing 
traditional  media  with  innovation  and  digital  marketing 
opportunities. Digital marketing and social media are now 
part of our everyday marketing focus on all campaigns.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

L
A

u
N
N
A

r
e
y
M

/

2
0

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
National store 
network

Darwin

Joondalup

Karrinyup

Morley

Perth City

Carousel

Garden City

Fremantle

Nt

SA

WA

vIc
Bendigo
Ballarat
Geelong

Brookside

Indooroopilly

Mt Gravatt

North Lakes

Chermside

Brisbane City
Carindale

Loganholme

Coomera

Pacific Fair
Robina

Cairns

Townsville

Mackay

qld

Maroochydore

Toowoomba

NSW & Act
Dubbo
Orange
Wollongong
Wagga
Albury

Green Hills

Tuggerah
Charlestown

Erina
Shell Harbour

ACT (2 stores)
Woden

Hornsby

Castle Hill

Warringah

Fountain Gate

Launceston

tAS

Hobart

Penrith

Blacktown

Parramatta

Macquarie

Chatswood

Top Ryde

Bankstown

Sydney 
City

Bondi

Roselands

Liverpool

Hurstville

Eastgardens

Elizabeth

Tea Tree Plaza

Adelaide City

Marion

Colonnades

Plenty Valley

Miranda

Highpoint

Northland

Melbourne City

Werribee

Doncaster

Eastland

Knox City

Chadstone

Southland

Dandenong

Frankston

Existing stores

Approved new stores
By anticipated opening*

2016

2017

2013

2014

2015

*Financial year

Vision

To be an international-class  
retailer providing inspiration  
to everyone

2012 
financial 
results

Our key categories of Miss Shop (Youth), 
Womenswear, Menswear and Cosmetics all 
performed ahead of last year in sales and  
gross profit. The best performing states were 
Western Australia and Queensland.

Full  year  2012  total  sales  were  $3,119  million.  Sales  in 
our  Myer  Exclusive  Brands  grew  by  over  five  percent 
to  $586  million  during  the  year  and  now  represent 
19  percent  of  the  sales  mix,  up  from  17.6  percent 
in 2011. 

The  overall  strong  operating  gross  profit  result  reflects 
the  success  of  a  number  of  key  initiatives  including 
an  improved  merchandise  mix,  an  increase  in  Myer 
Exclusive Brands, reduced markdowns, lower shrinkage, 
and  improved  sourcing,  as  well  as  the  contribution  of 
sass & bide.

As a result of a shift to brands focused on design, quality, 
colour and innovation, we achieved an improved gross 
profit margin across the Electrical category. During the 
year, we also achieved sales growth in some Electrical 
businesses despite ongoing significant price deflation, 
particularly 
in  TVs.  However,  the  category  overall 
continues to be challenging. The managed exit of white 
goods, gaming and consoles, and the rationalisation of 
CDs, DVDs and navigation systems, impacted sales by 
$31 million during FY2012. This was part of our longer-
term  plan  to  exit  categories  where  we  have  limited 
competitive advantage.

in  our  overall  markdowns 
A  significant  reduction 
was  achieved  in  FY2012,  benefiting  the  gross  profit 
result. While there was price deflation during the year 
associated  with  being  more  globally  competitive, 
this  was  offset  by  the  success  of  our  markdown 
reduction program.

As a result of the combined effort across all stores, we 
successfully achieved our target of reducing shrinkage 
due  to  theft  and  fraud  to  less  than  one  percent  of 
sales.  This  result  represents  global  best  practice  for 
department stores.

Our sourcing offices have exceeded our expectations in 
their first year of operation, delivering improved margin, 
enhanced product quality, and faster speed to market.

operating  gross  profit  margin  improved  by  150  basis 
points (bps) compared to FY2011.

We faced significant additional costs in FY2012, including:

1.  Increased 

investment 

in  customer  facing  hours 
totalling $17 million, in addition to $9 million invested 
during FY2011; and 

2.  Increased  operational  costs  including  store  wages, 
penalty rates and loadings, store occupancy (rents, 
rates, taxes and utilities), and a full year of operating 
costs associated with sass & bide.

In  addition  to  this  result  there  were  also  some  one-
off costs and  gains  with a negligible net profit after tax 
(NPAT) effect. There was a one-off gain of $16.2 million* 
relating to the renegotiation of the Adelaide store lease 
and  the  subsequent  write-back  of  a  fixed  lease  rental 
increase  provision  that  applied  to  that  store.  Offsetting 
this were $13.1 million* of one-off costs associated with 
the rationalisation of our store portfolio and the full exit 
of the CDs and DVDs category. In addition, there was a 
one-off  cost  associated  with  the  restructuring  of  the 
support office which took place in July 2012, amounting 
to $3.1 million*. 

Strong balance sheet
We  maintained  our  disciplined  focus  on  inventory 
management,  and  overall 
inventory  was  clean  at 
the  end  of  the  period,  totalling  $385.7  million,  up 
increased  by 
1.2  percent.  Underlying 
0.5  percent  to  $383  million  (adjusted  for  additional 
inventory  held  for  new  stores  at  Mackay,  Fountain  Gate 
and Townsville,  additional  inventory  held  for  sass  &  bide 
and adjusted for the impact of store closures at Forest Hill 
and Tuggeranong).

inventory 

Net debt was flat against last year at $383 million, and our 
net debt to earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and 
amortisation (EBITDA) ratio remained solid at 1.23 times, 
well within our covenant of less than 2.5 times. 

Growth in operating gross profit was achieved despite 
cycling the $17 million of profit underpinning (landlord 
contribution)  associated  with  the  Melbourne  store 
rebuild  received  in  FY2011.  Excluding  this  impact,  the 

We continue to generate strong cash flow, have a stable 
balance sheet and there remains significant headroom 
in our banking covenants to support our strategic plan 
and investment in the future.

*post tax

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

L
A

u
N
N
A

r
e
y
M

/

4
0

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
280.000000

258.333333

236.666667

215.000000

193.333333

171.666667

150.000000

41.50

39.75

38.00

8.250000

7.041667

5.833333

4.625000

3.416667

2.208333

1.000000

ebit

impacted by 
increased costs and 
depreciation

3.4

3.2

3.0

2.8

2.6

2.4

2.2

strong
result
reflecting delivery  
on key initiatives

2.0

41.3

40.3

170.0

127.5

85.0

42.5
39.6

0.0

39.5

39.2

3.32

3.26

3.28

3.16

3.12

FY08

FY09

FY10

FY11

FY12

Sales ($b)

EBIt margin  
(%)

7.2

6.4

8.3

8.2

7.4

213

236

271

259

230

95.8

108.7

168.7

162.7

139.3

FY08

FY09

FY10

FY11

FY12

FY08

FY09

FY10

FY11

FY12

FY08

FY09

FY10

FY11

FY12

Operating gross profit margin (%)

Earnings before interest  
and tax (EBIt) ($m)

5

10
0
Net profit after tax ($m)

15

20

25

30

Financial Summary

Sales ($m)

Operating gross profit ($m)

Operating gross profit margin (%)

Cash cost of doing business ($m)

Earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, 
amortisation (EBITDA) ($m)

Earnings before interest and tax (EBIT) ($m)

Statutory net profit after tax  
(after non-controlling interest) ($m)

Impact of one-off items ($m)

Net profit after tax (NPAT)  
(after non-controlling interest) ($m)

FY2012

FY2011

Change (%)

3,119.1

1,288.4

41.31

976.6

3,158.8

1,271.6

40.26

933.7 

(1.3)

1.3

+105 bps

4.6

311.8

230.0

139.4

(0.1)

337.9

258.9

159.7

3.0

(7.7)

(11.2)

(12.7)

FY10

FY11

29.0

27.9

0

FY12

5

10

15

23.9

20

25

Earnings per share (cents)

FY10

FY11

FY12

22.0

22.5

19.0

139.3

162.7

(14.3)

Full year dividends (cents)

FY2012 NPAT of $139.3m excludes store closure and restructuring costs of $13.1m (after tax), the cost 
of redundancies of $3.1m (after tax) and the gain on the write-back of the fixed lease rental increase 
provision of $16.2m (after tax). FY2011 NPAT of $162.7m excludes residual Initial Public Offering (IPO) 
costs of $3.5m (after tax), store closure and restructuring costs of $7.6m (after tax), and the profit on 
sale of our shareholding in Harris Scarfe of $8.2m (after tax).

from the 
chairman 

I am pleased to present the 2012 Myer Holdings 
Limited Annual Report to our shareholders.

tough  consumer  environment  has  been 
The 
widely  reported  and  these  challenging  conditions 
continue.  However,  the  Myer  management  team 
has 
they 
have  developed  which  has  ensured  the  business  
delivered a solid result.

successfully  executed 

strategy 

the 

The  Board  is  confident  that  the  five-point  strategy  is 
the right one to drive the business through the current 
cycle and ensure we are well positioned for the future.

Business performance
Total  sales  for  the  full  year  ended  28  July  2012  were 
down 1.3 percent to $3,119 million.

In order to meet the changing demands of customers 
and  rapidly  evolving  technology,  we  have  exited  
some  categories  and  refined  our  merchandise  offer. 
Excluding  these  planned  changes,  total  sales  were 
down 0.3 percent which is a credible result considering 
the continued weak consumer sentiment.

Successful  initiatives  to  refine  the  merchandise  mix, 
improve sourcing, optimise promotional effectiveness, 
reduce shrinkage and increase the contribution of Myer 
Exclusive  Brands  have  combined  to  deliver  a  strong 
operating gross profit result ahead of last year.

The  business  is  facing  a  number  of  increasing  costs 
relating  to  employment,  occupancy  and  utilities.  As  a 
result, management has taken steps to rebase the cost 
structure  of  the  business,  reducing  the  impact  of  the 
cost pressures. Following our significant recent capital 
investment in the business, which underpins our future 
growth, depreciation charges have also increased.

We  reported  a  net  profit  after  tax  of  $139.3  million, 
down  14.3  percent  on  last  year,  and  within  guidance 
issued to the market in May 2012.

The  Board  was  pleased  to  determine  a  fully  franked 
final  dividend  of  9  cents  per  share,  taking  the  full  year 
dividend to 19 cents per share. The dividend will be paid 
on  14  November  2012  to  all  shareholders  registered  on 
28 September 2012. We remain confident in the strength of 
our balance sheet and continued strong cash generation. 

Operational highlights
During  the  year  we  have  continued  to  enhance  our 
merchandise offer with a focus on inspiring and delighting 
customers.  Myer  Exclusive  Brands  now  contribute 
19  percent  of  department  store  sales,  represented 
across  all  merchandise  categories  and  price  points. 
The performance of our two sourcing offices in Asia has 
exceeded  expectations  and  supported  the  continuing 
growth of our brands.

Following  the  success  of  the  sass  &  bide  investment 
in  2011,  Myer  made  a  number  of  strategic  and 
important brand acquisitions which further strengthen 
our merchandise offer.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

L
A

u
N
N
A

r
e
y
M

/

6
0

I  am  very  encouraged  by  the  feedback  from  customers 
and team members on our progress on, and commitment 
to, improving customer service. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  consumer  preferences  are 
changing as technology enables access to a proliferation 
retailing.  
of  product,  particularly  through  online 
I strongly believe that we are well placed to capitalise on 
the strength of the trusted Myer brand, store network, 
depth of offer and leading loyalty program to deliver a 
leading  omni-channel  offer  in  this  new  environment. 
However, to be successful in this, we must continue to 
be nimble and adaptable in our approach.

Our people and sustainability
The  commitment  and  focus  of  our  12,500  team 
members is a significant strength of the Myer business.

I am proud that we have continued the philanthropic 
heritage  on  which  Myer  was  built  and  that  we  are 
committed to communities we serve across the country. 
This year, the Myer Stores Community Fund contributed 
to over 70 charities nationwide, including The Salvation 
Army,  the  Olivia  Newton  John  Cancer  and  Wellness 
Centre, the Smile Foundation and The Smith Family.

Our  whole  team  is  committed  to  continuing  to  build 
responsible and sustainable business practices. We also 
believe  in  creating  a  fair  and  inclusive  environment 
that  embraces  diversity  at  all  levels,  with  a  particular 
focus on gender diversity. Our workforce gender ratios 
continue  to  reflect  this  commitment  at  management, 
team member, as well as at Board level.

the Board
During the year, Mr Tom Flood announced his retirement 
from the Board after a significant contribution of over 
five  years  of  service  to  Myer. Tom’s  considerable  retail 
experience and guidance over this time was extremely 
valuable, and we wish him well for the future.

In August, we announced the appointments of Mr Paul 
McClintock  AO  and  Mr  Ian  Morrice  as  non-executive 
directors  to  the  Myer  Board.  Mr  Rupert  Myer  AM  was 
also  appointed  Deputy  Chairman  at  this  time.  These 
appointments further strengthen the Myer Board with 
significant strategic and retail experience.

the future
When  the  Company  was  listed  in  November  2009, 
it  was  predicated  on  a  substantial  recovery  of  Myer. 
Management  have  recovered  the  business  from  a 
serious  loss  making  business  to  a  business  that  is 
highly  efficient,  generating  strong  cash  flow  and 
profitability. Prospectus forecasts were delivered in 2010 
before  the  onset  of  significant  headwinds,  and  since 
then the business has been adjusted to accommodate 
the  challenging  environment.  As  a  shareholder,  I  am 
disappointed  in  the  current  share  price;  however,  the 
business  will  continue  to  concentrate  on  delivering 
returns that exceed our cost of capital and then ultimately 
the share price will begin to reflect our strategy.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
focus
on inspiring 
& Delighting 
customers

Howard McDonald
Chairman 
Until 10 October 
2012

In August, I announced my intention to retire from the 
Board at the conclusion of the October Board meeting. 
The timing of my decision follows the extension of the 
contract of Myer CEO and Managing Director, Mr Bernie 
Brookes,  through  until  August  2014,  and  a  desire  to 
ensure  continuity  of  Board  leadership  over  the  period 
to that date and beyond.

The  Board  took  the  view  in  support  of  the  decision 
that  continuity  of  Board  leadership  is  appropriate 
throughout  the  CEO  succession  process  and  beyond 
2014 into the new CEO appointment term, and that a 
process of Board succession is equally important.

I am confident that our new Chairman, Paul McClintock, 
has  the  requisite  experience  to  lead  Myer  forward. 
Shareholders  will  have  the  opportunity  to  meet  Paul  
at our upcoming Annual General Meeting in December 
in Melbourne. 

I  would  like  to  thank  the  Board,  management  and  all 
Myer  team  members  for  their  support  throughout 
my  time  with  Myer.  I  have  enjoyed  my  experience 
immensely,  and  it  has  been  a  tremendous  honour 
to  serve  an  Australian  retail  business  that  has  been  in 
existence for over 100 years.

I  would  also  like  to  express  my  appreciation  for  the 
support  you,  our  shareholders  and  customers,  have 
shown;  and  I  have  every  confidence  I  am  leaving  the 
business  under  good  leadership  for  the  future.  I  look 
forward to following Myer’s progress and achievements 
in coming years.

Howard Mcdonald
Chairman (until 10 October 2012)

I am delighted to have been chosen as the Company’s 
new  Chairman  to  replace  Howard  McDonald  on  his 
retirement  from  the  Board  in  October.  I  have  already 
had  the  chance  to  visit  a  number  of  stores  and  I  am 
impressed  by  their  presentation,  as  well  as  with  the 
calibre  of  the  management  team  I  have  also  had  the 
opportunity to meet.

I believe Myer has an exciting future and I am looking 
forward  to  working  with  my  fellow  Directors,  Bernie 
Brookes  and  the  entire  management  team  to  ensure 
we  capitalise  on  opportunities  to  grow  the  business 
and maximise shareholder returns. 

I  look  forward  to  meeting  shareholders  at  the  Annual 
General Meeting in December.

paul McClintock 
Chairman 
From 10 October 
2012

Paul Mcclintock
Chairman (from 10 October 2012)

M
y
e
r

A
N
N
u

A
L

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

0
7

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
from 
the  ceo

The 2012 financial year has been very challenging. 
Notwithstanding all the factors thwarting the 
retail environment, we have pursued our five-point 
strategic plan, which has buffered the business 
against the ongoing headwinds, as well as 
providing a clear direction for the business for the 
future. In addition to outlining our 2012 results,  
I also take this opportunity to share my thoughts  
on the changing consumer and discretionary  
retail landscape in Australia.

Financial result
Total  sales  for  the  year  ended  28  July  2012  were 
$3.12 billion, down 1.3 percent on last year, and down 
2.0  percent  on  a  comparable  store  sales  basis.  While 
reflective  of  the  general  economic  environment,  the 
result  continues  to  also  be  impacted  by  our  planned 
category  exits  and  rationalisations  in  the  Electrical 
category (whitegoods, consoles and games, CDs, DVDs 
and navigation systems). 

Our key categories of Miss Shop (Youth), Womenswear, 
Menswear  and  Cosmetics  all  performed  positively 
against last year.

The highlight of this year’s result is the strong operating 
gross  profit,  up  1.3  percent  to  $1.29  billion,  reflecting 
a  number  of  key  achievements.  We  grew  our  Myer 
Exclusive  Brands  to  19  percent  of  sales  mix,  achieved 
our  shrinkage  target  of  one  percent,  reduced  our 
markdowns and further improved our sourcing.

We reported EBITDA of $311.8 million, down 7.7 percent, 
and EBIT of $230.0 million, down 11.2 percent.

We maintained a disciplined focus on costs; however, as 
outlined in FY2011, we faced significant additional costs 
this year, driven by: increased investment in customer 
facing  wages;  increased  depreciation;  and  ongoing 
increased operational costs. 

The  business  delivered  NPAT  of  $139.3  million,  down 
14.3 percent, a credible result in a tough environment. 

These results, particularly the improvement in our gross 
profit, demonstrate that our five-point strategy is right 
for the business. 

A highlight for 2012 was the encouraging results from 
our  investment  in  improving  customer  service,  with 
additional  customer  facing  hours  and  a  number  of 
service and efficiency initiatives.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

L
A

u
N
N
A

r
e
y
M

/

8
0

We  have  maintained  our  focus  on  enhancing  our 
merchandise  offer  including  strong  growth  in  our  Myer 
Exclusive Brands. Following the success of our sass & bide 
investment,  we  have  continued  our  strategy  to  pursue 
brands which will strengthen our offer. During the year, we 
purchased the well-known Australian brands Trent Nathan, 
Bauhaus, and Grab. We have brands we own and develop, 
brands we have purchased, and wanted brands for which 
we have exclusive distribution rights. Our sourcing offices 
in Asia are delivering ahead of expectations, supporting 
the growth of our Myer Exclusive Brands through direct 
purchasing of product at competitive pricing levels.

During the year, we progressed our plans to build a leading 
omni-channel offer. The Myer brand, our store network, 
loyalty  program  and  extensive  merchandise  offer  are 
significant  strengths  as  we  seek  to  deliver  a  seamless 
experience for our customers across all retail channels. 

We  opened  a  new  store  in  Mackay  (Queensland). 
In  September,  we  opened  a  new  store  in  Fountain 
Gate  (Victoria),  and  will  shortly  open  a  store 
in 
Townsville (Queensland). 

Success in an evolving landscape
As  I  reflect  on  2012  and  look  towards  the  future,  I’d 
like  to  share  my  thoughts  on  both  the  challenges  and 
opportunities facing discretionary retail in Australia today.

During the past few years, the retail industry has been 
under  significant  pressure.  An  increasing  number  of 
retailers  have  been  forced  into  administration  as  they 
falter  under  the  strain  of  a  tough  economic  cycle, 
changing  consumer  demands  and  the  pressure  of 
online alternatives in the market.

The  industry  is  faced  with  a  significant  challenge. 
Consumer  confidence  is  low  as  customers  remain 
nervous about domestic and global political uncertainty 
and cost of living pressures. They are concerned about 
housing values, employment, new taxes and declining 
superannuation  balances.  The  uncertainty  is  causing 
consumers to save more than they have in decades.

Consumers  are  also  now  more  empowered  than 
ever.  International  purchasing  power  has  been  driven  
by  the  sustained  strength  of  the  Australian  dollar  
and  highly  transparent  pricing  and  product  access 
through technology. 

They  are  being  offered  more  choice  than  ever  before 
with new international entrants to the Australian market 
and the abundance of pure online operators. Consumer 
spending  overall 
is  also  shifting  to  services,  and 
investments  in  health  and  lifestyle  choices.  While  the 
consumer does not shun traditional retail experiences, 
technology  savvy  customers  now  expect  to  be  able 
to  engage  with  retailers  whenever  and  however  
they choose. We are responding to these challenges.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Bernie Brookes
Managing Director 
and CEO

repositioning
the  business

In addition to these structural changes, cost pressures 
including  significant  increases  in  employment  costs, 
escalating rents, and in some cases reduced prices as a 
result of global price harmonisation are also impacting 
discretionary retailers.

What do I believe discretionary retailers need to do in 
the face of these challenges? In order to succeed in this 
environment,  retailers  must  remain  flexible  and  adapt 
to the changing landscape.

At  Myer,  we  recognise  that  a  significant  opportunity 
exists  to  respond  and  evolve  our  business  to  exceed 
the expectations of our consumers and to succeed in 
a changing world of retail. The traditional retail model, 
including  the  Myer  model,  must  be  re-engineered.  
We are reframing our business.

The strength of the Myer brand, the depth and breadth 
of our offering, our loyalty program and the skills and 
dedication of our 12,500 team members across 67 stores 
are  key  to  this  evolution  and  central  to  our  omni-
channel  strategy. We  are  committed  to  continuing  to 
improve our service to customers with an experienced, 
knowledgeable,  and  incentivised  team.  We  will  also 
continue  to  identify  and  progress  new  opportunities 
through our focus on innovation and in the pursuit of 
new business opportunities.

I would like to thank all of our team members for their 
hard work and support this last year.

As  we  look  towards  2013,  I  am  encouraged  by  the 
progress  we  have  made  and  I  am  certain  that  we 
will  continue  to  deliver  on  our  plans  for  the  business, 
generating the success we believe is warranted. 

Bernie Brookes

Managing Director and CEO

M
y
e
r

A
N
N
u

A
L

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

0
9

12,500

team members in 
67 stores are central 
to our omni-channel 
strategy

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Review of 
Operations

During the year, we made good progress 
on our strategic plan, including a number  
of new initiatives. 

In  a  continued  challenging  retail  environment  with 
subdued  consumer  confidence,  Myer  delivered  a  solid 
result and finished the year with three months of positive 
comparable store sales growth. 

The  highlight  of  this  year’s  result  was  the  strong 
gross  profit  performance,  which  reflects  a  number  of 
key  achievements.  We  delivered  on  our  objectives, 
growing  our  Myer  Exclusive  Brands  to  19  percent  of 
sales,  achieving  our  shrinkage  target  of  one  percent, 
reducing  our  promotional  markdowns  and  improving 
our sourcing.

The progress we made in implementing our five-point 
strategic plan clearly supported the profitability of the 
business and helped to offset ongoing cost headwinds.

We are encouraged by the continued positive feedback 
from  customers  and  team  members  as  we  focus  on 
delivering an inspiring customer solution, with improved 
customer service and an enhanced merchandise range. 

We have delivered on a number of initiatives to improve 
both  our  loyalty  program  and  omni-channel  offer  to 
reflect changing customer needs in this environment of 
rapidly evolving technology.

strong 
gross 
profit
reflects a number of 
key achievements

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

L
A

u
N
N
A

r
e
y
M

/

0
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
optimise 
our  store 
network

We continued with our strategy of 
investing in our store network with 
new stores and refurbishments. 

Represented in  
29 of Australia’s  
30 largest shopping 
centres

Our  flagship  Myer  Melbourne  store  was  recognised 
internationally  with  the  Retail  Store  Design  of  the  
Year  award  at  the  2011  World  Retail  Congress  in 
September 2011.

Ensuring  we  have  the  appropriate  selling  floor  space 
in  the  best  retail  locations  and  maximising  space 
productivity  continues  to  be  a  focus  across  the  store 
network.  Reflecting  this  strategy,  the  overall  store 
footprint will remain broadly at 1.2 million square metres 
as we exit some stores as part of lease discussions and 
return  some  floor  space  to  landlords  in  the  context  
of refurbishments.

During  the  year,  we  opened  a  new  store  in  Mackay 
(Queensland),  which  has  traded  well  with  particularly 
strong customer support of our Myer Exclusive Brands.

We  recently  opened  a  new  store  at  Fountain  Gate 
(Victoria),  one  of  Australia’s  largest  shopping  centres 
by  turnover,  and  where  Myer  is  the  only  full-line 
department store. 

We  are  looking  forward  to  the  imminent  opening  of 
our  Townsville  (Queensland)  store  in  October  2012, 
where  the  community  is  eagerly  awaiting  its  first  full-
line  department  store,  with  the  area  benefiting  from 
significant resources industry investment.

During the year, we announced our intention to open a 
new store in Darwin (Northern Territory) in 2016.

Stores  at  Forest  Hill 
(Victoria)  and  Tuggeranong 
(Australian Capital Territory) were closed during the year 
as the leases at these stores expired. All team members 
were successfully redeployed to nearby Myer stores.

In  September,  we  announced 
the  Fremantle 
(Western Australia) store lease would not be renewed 
notwithstanding constructive discussions with the City 
of Fremantle and the landlord. The store is expected to 
close in the first half of calendar year 2013.

We also announced the Elizabeth (South Australia) store 
lease would not be renewed when the lease expires in 
February 2014.

The Fremantle and Elizabeth stores together represent 
less than one percent of total sales, and Myer one data 
indicate  that  the  majority  of  customers  also  shop  at 
nearby Myer stores.

The refurbishment of our Liverpool (New South Wales) 
store delivered a complete refresh of the offer, fixtures 
and  fittings,  as  well  as  a  30  percent  reduction  in  total 
space,  enabling  greater  efficiency  and  productivity. 
We  also  completed  a  refurbishment  of  our  Carindale 
(Queensland) store and relaunched this store in March. 

in 

We  have  commenced  the  refurbishment  of  our 
store 
Indooroopilly  (Queensland),  with  scoping 
works  underway  for  refurbishments  at  our  stores  in 
Miranda  (New  South  Wales)  and  Highpoint  (Victoria), 
and  for  a  significant  upgrade  of  our  store  in  Adelaide  
(South Australia).

The scope of each refurbishment is dependent on the 
unique circumstances of the store. In all cases we aim to 
refresh the offer with new brands, upgrade the fixtures, 
fittings and floorings and ensure an optimal store layout 
reflecting the demands of the local demographic.

We were pleased to achieve rent reductions in a handful 
of stores during the year. We will continue to review all 
new and existing stores to ensure the returns meet our 
investment criteria.

R
E

v

I
E
W

O
F

O
P
E
R
A
t
I

O
N
S

M
y
e
r

A
N
N
u

A
L

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

1
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Review of Operations

enhance  our 
merchanDise 
offer

We seek to remain 
relevant to 
changing customer 
preferences 

Inspiring and delighting our customers 
Our  focus  remains  on  being  the  first  choice  for 
customers  when  shopping  for  fashion,  cosmetics  and 
the home. We have the largest range of desired brands 
and styles that offer newness, fashionability, quality and 
value, with increasing exclusivity.

Our brand hierarchy is split into three segments: Myer 
Exclusive  Brands,  International  and  National  brands, 
and Concessions. 

Our 57 Myer Exclusive Brands are comprised of brands 
developed by Myer, Designers @ Myer, National Brands 
owned  by  Myer,  and  Licensed  National  Brands.  Myer 
Exclusive  Brands  are  represented  across  a  wide  range 
of price points and all categories. We stretch key brands 
into new categories when they are well established and 
enjoy strong customer support.

Myer  Exclusive  Brands  deliver  a  significantly  higher 
margin  through  the  vertical-integration  of  design, 
development,  sourcing,  supply  chain,  and  marketing. 
Our sourcing offices in Shanghai and Hong Kong were 
established in 2011 and are exceeding expectations in 
both volume and pricing.

During  the  year,  there  were  a  number  of  key 
developments across all of our range.

The  brands  that  performed  well  included  Wayne  by 
Wayne  Cooper,  regatta,  Basque,  Cue,  Blaq,  politix, 
Ziggy, review, tokito, Lipsy, Miss Shop, Jack Stone, 
t.M. Lewin, Mecca Cosmetica, Kit, Benefit, Heritage, 
Jane Lamerton Home, Apple, Lego, and KitchenAid.

There  was  continued  strong  sales  and  profit  growth 
from sass & bide, supported by our customers’ positive 
response  in  18  of  our  stores  and  online.  The  recent 
extension of sass & bide into intimates has been highly 
successful with a very positive customer response. 

As part of our focus to enhance our merchandise offer, 
we look to purchase unique brands that complement 
our  brand  hierarchy,  offer  compelling  return  on 
investment  and  add  shareholder  value.  During 
2012,  we  purchased  a  number  of  brands,  including  
trent Nathan (womenswear, menswear and jewellery), 
which  was  recently  launched  as  a  department  store 
exclusive into 34 stores for Spring Summer 2013. 

New  Myer  Exclusive  Brands  currently  being  launched 
include  Material  World  by  Madonna,  Fleurette  by 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

L
A

u
N
N
A

r
e
y
M

/

2
1

sass & biDe

There was continued 
strong sales and profit 
growth from sass & bide

Fleur Wood,  Grab  Denim,  Karen Walker  Home,  and 
Australian House and Garden (homewares).

New  brands  to  be  shortly  introduced  include  peep 
toe, Diesel, Speedo, o.p.I nails, Modern Amusement, 
eleven  paris  and  55DSL.  We  also  have  a  number  of 
new  International  designer  brands  being  launched 
including Kenzo, Jil Sander Navy, Alberta Ferretti, and 
peter pilotto in womenswear and McQ by Alexander 
McQueen, Joseph and Hartford in menswear.

Recent  extensions  of  Myer  Exclusive  Brands  into  new 
categories include Miss Shop cosmetics and Leona by 
Leona edmiston handbags and sleepwear.

Our  sourcing  offices  are  integral  in  supporting  the 
continued growth in our Myer Exclusive Brands.

As  we  seek  to  remain  relevant  to  changing  customer 
preferences and evolving technology, we have exited a 
number of categories during the past three years. These 
have included whitegoods, gaming and consoles, and 
we have plans to exit CDs and DVDs.

We  have  refined  our  offer  of  TVs  and  entertainment 
goods,  focusing  on  premium  product  in  line  with  our 
focus on leading edge fashionability.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
R
E

v

I
E
W

O
F

O
P
E
R
A
t
I

O
N
S

newness, 
fashionability,
quality anD
Value

 
 
Review of Operations

improVe 
customer 
serVice

Building on our initial customer research and 
their recent positive feedback, we continued 
our investment in improving the customer 
experience with a number of service and 
efficiency initiatives during the year. 

Service initiatives
We continued our targeted and measured investment 
in  additional  customer  facing  hours  in  high  service 
categories during high service times. 

We  are  continually  refining  new  processes  and 
initiatives  to  improve  our  overall  engagement  with 
customers. Some recent examples include an enhanced 
commission  scheme,  enabling  stores  with  new 
technology and adjusting resources to meet customer 
shopping preferences.

Other  service  initiatives  have  included  the  national 
rollout of our profit-based commission scheme to our 
Electrical  and  Furniture  team  members,  additional 
staffing in fitting rooms and an improved service model 
for Myer Exclusive Brands. An improved and extended 
personal  shopping  service  was  introduced  into  more 
stores,  fostering  closer  customer  relationships  and 
encouraging  increased  sales  productivity  from  our 
personal shopper consultants.

We  continued  to  focus  on  improving  team  member 
product  knowledge  and  selling  skills.  We  enhanced 
our  Reward  and  Recognition  program  with  almost 
1,000 team members now part of our High Performers 
Club.  These  High  Performers  Club  team  members  
are  role  models  within  the  broader  team,  driving  
higher  standards  of  customer  service,  sales,  and  
product knowledge.

We also continue to grow our team member Customer 
Service  recognition  program,  with  over  6,000  of  our 
team members now rewarded. We have also launched 
a reward and recognition program for our store support 
team members, and both of these programs have been 
extended to our Concession partners.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

L
A

u
N
N
A

r
e
y
M

/

4
1

Efficiency initiatives
A  highlight  for  2012  was  achieving  our  one  percent 
shrinkage  target  following  the  investment  in  closed-
circuit-TV  and  the  Company  wide  efforts  of  team 
members  to  counter  theft  and  fraud.  This  is  a  global 
best practice result for department stores.

Over 5,000 people were referred to police in line with 
Myer’s  zero-tolerance  policy  in  relation  to  shoplifting 
over  the  past  12  months.  Controlling  stock 
loss 
and  regular  stocktake  counting  has  also  resulted  in 
more  accurate  control  of  inventory  and  improved 
merchandise availability for customers. 

We  continued  our  program  of  clustering  and 
consolidating  point-of-sale  (POS),  and  this  has  now 
been  implemented  in  25  stores.  Our  customers  have 
provided  positive  feedback  that  there  has  been  an 
improvement in staff availability at sale points.

We  implemented  a  new  seasonal  management  and 
replanning tool for improved store wage management.

We  are  improving  the  ‘floor  ready’  standard  of  our 
merchandise,  which  involves  delivering  stock  to  the 
shop floor with reduced packaging, and ensuring that it 
is pre-hung, security-tagged and price-ticketed, freeing 
up team members to serve customers.

The customer and team member feedback in response 
to  our  focus  on  improving  customer  service  has 
been  very  encouraging.  All  of  our  team  members  are 
to  be  commended  for  their  commitment  during  a 
challenging year.

We  will  continue  to  refine  our  customer  service  and 
initiatives  throughout  2013.  We  believe 
efficiency 
that  service  and  the  right  merchandise  mix  are  the  
key  differentiators  in  an  environment  of  increasing 
online competition.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
myer one 
phone app
Our new MYER one 
smart phone app  
will deliver digital 
rewards cards 

strengthen 
our  loyalty
program

Our MYER one loyalty program with 
4.7 million members is one of Australia’s 
most successful programs, and represents 
a key strategic advantage. 

During  the  year,  we  signed  up  over  500,000  new 
members,  representing  an  increase  of  12  percent 
compared to the previous year.

We have significantly improved our digital communication 
with members with a program of more targeted emails. 
This  improved  weekly  email  now  includes  personalised 
updates and targeted offers for Myer one members.

We  now  have  the  email  addresses  of  2  million  Myer 
one  members  and  over  3  million  mobile  phone 
numbers.  Our  store  teams  continue  their  focus  on 
registering additional member email addresses, as this 
represents  a  low-cost  opportunity  to  communicate 
with our customers with targeted and relevant offers.

During  2012,  we  delivered  approximately  $50  million 
in rewards gift cards to Myer one members, and the 
redemption rate continues to be on average 3.8 times 
the value of the rewards gift card.

Our  new  Myer one  smart  phone  application  (app)  is 
in  the  final  stages  of  testing.  This  app  delivers  digital 
rewards gift cards that can be redeemed directly from 
the smart phone.

We  continued  to  build  on  our  Myer  one  affiliates 
program  and  now  have  over  480  partners  across 
1,720 locations around the country.

The  Myer Visa  card  continued  to  be  popular  with  our 
customers,  and  we  have  a  number  of  initiatives  in 
development to further strengthen our offers in relation 
to financial and corporate services.

Our Myer one loyalty program provides us with a key 
competitive  advantage  as  we  build  a  leading  omni-
channel  offer,  giving  us  incredible  insight  into  our  
customer preferences.

R
E

v

I
E
W

O
F

O
P
E
R
A
t
I

O
N
S

M
y
e
r

A
N
N
u

A
L

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

1
5

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Review of Operations

builD  
a  leaDing  
omni-channel 
offer

Consumer expectations and preferences 
have changed significantly in recent 
years, driven by new technology. 

Focused on 
delivering a seamless 
customer experience

We are well positioned to capitalise on our strong brand, 
store network, extensive merchandise offer, and loyalty 
program as we build a leading omni-channel offer.

investments 

Our  previous 
in  our  merchandise 
management  system,  POS  system,  and  supply  chain 
have  set  the  foundations  for  effective  inventory  and 
order management. This provides us with a significant 
competitive  advantage  in  the  development  of  our 
omni-channel offer.

retailing  has  emerged  globally 

Omni-channel 
in 
recent times. Omni-channel for Myer is defined by the 
increasing  expectation  by  our  customers  to  interact 
with  us  in  a  multitude  of  ways,  driven  by  their  time 
constraints,  and  the  desire  for  convenience,  choice, 
immediacy, and research, all enabled by technology.

Our customers now expect a consistent and seamless 
experience whether they are in stores, on our website, 
using  a  smartphone,  experiencing  our  marketing  and 
promotional  activity  or  speaking  with  our  customer 
service centre. 

Our  online  sales  more  than  doubled  and  the  rate  of 
growth has accelerated. With over 14 million unique visits 
to the myer.com.au website during the year, we believe 
this represents a significant opportunity for the business.

We  are  making  good  progress  on  redeveloping  our 
myer.com.au website, built on the WebSphere platform. 
We  have  successfully 
implemented  a  significant 
number  of  enhancements,  both  visible  to  customers 
and  behind  the  scenes,  with  a  strong  pipeline  of 
future improvements. 

improvements 

Key 
inspirational 
homepage  design,  a  one-page  check  out,  customer 
ratings and reviews, and enhanced conversion tactics.

included  a  new 

The  early  availability  of  our  Stocktake  Sale  online 
delivered our biggest ever sales day online.

We continue to increase the number of stock keeping 
units (skus) with 30,000 now online, all showcased with 
improved imagery and product information, ratings and 
reviews, and enhanced search capability to improve the 
customer experience.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

L
A

u
N
N
A

r
e
y
M

/

6
1

We  are  increasingly  focused  on  integrated  marketing, 
balancing traditional media with innovation and digital 
marketing  opportunities.  Digital  marketing  and  social 
media are part of our everyday marketing approach. We 
are encouraged by the increasing engagement of our 
customers across multiple social media channels.

Rich  and  engaging  video  content  is  being  created 
across  our  business  to  support  advertising  and 
marketing  campaigns,  and  to  connect  our  designers 
and  new  brands  with  our  customers.  During  the  year, 
we  increasingly  used  video  on  our  website  to  stream 
our  fashion  season  launch  parades  and  to  provide 
behind the scenes insight into our campaigns.

We  will  continue  to  implement  a  significant  pipeline 
of  enhancements  for  our  website,  building  on  the 
merchandise  offer  and  site  functionality,  including 
Myer one personalisation. 

We  recognise  that  our  customers  want  to  be  able  to 
touch and feel products in store as well as engage with 
knowledgeable  and  helpful  staff.  We  are  focused  on 
delivering  a  seamless  customer  experience  across  all 
digital  and  retail  touch  points,  and  our  e-commerce, 
loyalty program and stores network are integral to the 
success of this strategy.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
R
E

v

I
E
W

O
F

O
P
E
R
A
t
I

O
N
S

oVer   
14 million 
unique  Visits 
to  the  myer 
website  
last  year

 
 
Sustainability

At Myer we are committed to 
responsible business operations  
and development. Our sustainability 
strategy is built on four key pillars – 
people, community, business  
and environment.

community

Myer is committed to our local communities 
and maintaining strong relationships with 
local communities remains an important 
element of our sustainability strategy.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

L
A

u
N
N
A

r
e
y
M

/

8
1

charity and philanthropy
Many of our team members are engaged with their local 
communities through their active involvement with the 
Myer Stores Community Fund. The Fund contributes to 
children’s, youth, men’s and women’s health charities and 
in  2012  raised  over  $1.2  million  through  initiatives  and 
events including our annual Precious Metal Ball. The Fund 
has contributed to over 70 charities nationwide including 
The Salvation Army, the Olivia Newton John Cancer and 
Wellness  Centre,  the  Smile  Foundation  and  The  Smith 
Family. In 2012, the Fund also provided relief to a number 
of community services in the lead up to Christmas.

local community engagement
Our  stores  connect  with  their  customers  and  local 
communities  by  building  positive  brand  awareness, 
customer  recognition  and  loyalty  through  public  events 
and sponsorships including Chinese New Year celebrations 
in  our  Melbourne  store  and  partnerships  with  the 
Melbourne Zoo and the Melbourne Symphony Orchestra. 

We  have  also  provided  customers  opportunities  to 
attend  complimentary  fashion  and  beauty  styling 
workshops,  and  meet  our  ambassadors  at  family 
fun  days  to  celebrate  new  store  openings  and  store 
refurbishment  launches.  In  2012,  community  events 
were held at Carindale (Queensland), Eastland (Victoria), 
Liverpool (New South Wales) and Mackay (Queensland). 
When  we  launched  the  2012  Autumn  Winter  season,  
in-store fashion parades attracted a high level of interest 
and attendance from customers.

This  year,  we  continued  our  partnership  with  Vision 
Australia’s  Carols  by  Candlelight,  as  well  as  supporting 
Christmas  activities  around  the  country  including  the 
Myer  Brisbane  Christmas  Parade  and  Pantomime,  the 
Myer  Hobart  Christmas  Pageant  and  the  Myer  Hobart 
Carols  by  the  Bay.  We  were  pleased  to  celebrate  the 
56th anniversary of the Myer Christmas Windows, with 
installations in Melbourne and Brisbane stores. 

Myer  also  helped  raise  funds  to  benefit  a  number 
of  charity  groups,  such  as  the  Might  and  Power  Race 
Day in Sydney in July 2012 in  support of  the  Cerebral  
Palsy Alliance.

To  help  our  team  members  further  connect  with 
their  communities,  we  have  introduced  a  Volunteer 
Leave policy that provides one day paid leave per year  
to  work  in  the  community  with  charity  groups  or  
local organisations.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
people

Myer is one of the largest private sector employers 
in Australia, with over 12,500 team members 
throughout the country. We are committed to 
offering a supportive, challenging, and rewarding 
workplace, and enabling our people to contribute 
and develop to their full potential. During the  
year, we were recognised as the Australian  
Retail Association – Australian Retail Employer  
of the Year.

.

0
0
2

.

5
4
1

.

5
1
1

.

9
0
1

9
0
y
F

0
1
y
F

1
1
y
F

2
1
y
F

improVeD 
safety 
performance
– (ltIFR)

Recruitment, learning and development
Myer continues to recruit and develop team members 
who  are  engaged  and  passionate  about  retail.  We 
provide  opportunities  for  career  development  and 
reward 
for  performance.  Regular  appraisals  and 
two-way  feedback  are  a  key  part  of  performance 
measurement and goal setting.

Myer  supports  individual  learning  and  development 
through a variety of channels. In stores, we develop high 
potential  team  members  through  structured  and  self-
driven  development  plans.  We  have  piloted  learning 
programs  in  our  stores  with  a  combined  Certificate  II 
and III in Retail which provides future leaders with core 
retail skills.

In  2012,  Myer  team  members  were  finalists 
in  
national  retail  awards  including  the  National  Retail 
Association Young Retailer of the Year and the Joe Berry 
Australian Retail Industry Executive Award for emerging 
young leaders. 

Advancing diversity
The aim of our revised Diversity Policy is to create and 
maintain  an  inclusive  and  collaborative  workplace 
culture, with a focus on gender diversity. More detailed 
information  about  Myer’s  measurable  objectives  for 
diversity is provided on page 36 of this report. 

Myer  also  supports  initiatives  to  present  Indigenous 
Australians  with  opportunities  in  retail  employment, 
signing  the  Australian  Employment  Covenant  (AEC) 
during the year.

Benefits and rewards
We  provide  team  members  with  the  opportunity  to 
balance  work  and  family  responsibilities,  including 
graduated return to work from parental leave. We have 
a  calendar  of  social,  community  and  sporting  events 
for our support office to help promote a healthy work-
life  balance.  As  part  of  our  commitment  to  creating  a 
supportive work environment for our people, we have 
introduced ‘Lifestyle  Leave’,  giving  permanent  salaried 
team  members  the  option  of  greater  periods  of  leave 
offset by an adjustment to pay. 

We recognise and celebrate performance with a number of 
formal rewards programs. These form part of our employee 
value proposition and demonstrate our commitment to 
both  attracting  and  retaining  team  members,  as  well  as 
recognising contribution to the business. 

The annual Myer Inspirational People Awards recognise 
the  contributions  of  individuals  and  teams.  This  year 
we  presented  the  inaugural  award  for ‘Environmental 
Sustainability  Passion’  to  the  Myer  Dandenong  store 
team 
improving  paper, 
cardboard and plastic recycling. 

for  their  efforts  towards 

to 

Our  CEO’s  High  Performers  Club  and  Service  Heroes 
programs  provide  opportunities 
reward  and 
recognise store team members for their efforts. In 2012, 
we  inducted  more  than  300  team  members  into  the 
High  Performers  Club  where  members  generate  the 
highest individual sales performance in stores. We have 
extended  our  Service  Heroes  program  to  recognise 
those  who  provide  superior  service  in  non-customer 
facing roles.

The  Myer  25  Year  Club  recognises  the  loyalty  and 
achievements of our longstanding team members, with 
166  new  members  inducted  this  year.  Approximately 
1,400  team  members,  past  and  present,  attended  
25 Year Club celebrations.

Safety
We  want  our  stores  to  be  a  safe  environment  for 
customers to shop, and for team members to be able to 
do their job safely at all times. Safety is a key performance 
measure across the business. Myer trains team members 
in  safe  work  practices  including  manual  handling, 
hazard identification and incident reporting, first aid and 
emergency procedures. A number of stores took part in 
Safe Work Australia Week during October 2011. 

In  2012,  all  our  safety  measures  delivered  improved 
results on last year. The hours lost associated with injury 
reduced by more than 18 percent. Our Lost Time Injury 
Frequency Rate (LTIFR) declined 5 percent from last year 
to 10.9.

S
u
S
t

A

I

N
A
B

I
l
I
t
y

M
y
e
r

A
N
N
u

A
L

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

1
9

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Sustainability

business

We consider the ethical and social 
implications of our business decisions, and 
aim to meet the reasonable expectations  
of all our stakeholders including customers, 
investors, suppliers and the community.

Ethical sourcing
Ethical  sourcing  is  an  integral  component  of  our 
sustainability strategy. In 2011, we endorsed our formal 
Ethical  Sourcing  Policy,  and  in  2012,  implemented  an 
audit  program  to  support  the  policy.  Myer  is  working 
collaboratively with suppliers to ensure compliance and 
improvement is achieved.

Fair trading 
We are committed to ensuring our team members deal 
with customers and suppliers in a responsible manner 
at  all  times.  Myer’s  fair  trading  compliance  program  is 
maintained to ensure it is consistent with the principles 
of  the  Australian  Standard  for  Compliance  Programs 
(AS3806)  and  relevant  consumer  laws  and  associated 
regulations. Our training programs have been updated 
to  incorporate  the  new  Australian  Consumer  Law. We 
seek  to  ensure  our  advertising  claims  are  clear  and 
accurate for our customers.

Product responsibility 
Myer  is  focused  on  ensuring  our  merchandise  is  safe, 
meets safety and labelling standards, and is suitable for 
its purpose and intended function. We have a team of 
merchandise compliance specialists who seek to ensure 
products comply with relevant regulatory requirements. 
We also have a robust compliance program comprising 
ongoing and specialised buyer education and training, 
and mandatory standards, tools and guidelines. 

We have a comprehensive program of product testing, 
audits  and 
inspection  processes,  where  selected 
products are sent to accredited laboratories for testing, 
subjected  to  in-house  technical  audits,  store-based 
inspections  at  our  distribution  centres,  or 
audits, 
through  our  overseas  sourcing  offices.  During  2012, 
we inspected and assessed thousands of products for 
compliance with safety and quality requirements.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

L
A

u
N
N
A

r
e
y
M

/

0
2

Governance
We aim for integrity in all interactions with customers, 
stakeholders,  government,  team  members  and  the 
community,  and  to  maintain  appropriate  governance 
standards  in  our  business  dealings.  All  Myer  team 
members, Directors and contractors must comply with 
Myer’s Code of Conduct. Our commitment to Corporate 
Governance is described in the Corporate Governance 
Statement on pages 26 to 38 of this report.

supplier 

relationships 

Supplier relations
We  are  committed  to  developing  positive  and 
productive 
and  having 
responsible and ethical dealings with our suppliers. The 
annual Myer Supplier of the Year Awards is a celebration 
of  the  important  contribution  our  suppliers  make  to 
the  business.  The  event  provides  the  opportunity  for 
us  to  formally  recognise  our  top  performing  suppliers 
for  outstanding  support  in  helping  us  to  achieve  our 
business  goals.  In  December  2011,  De’Longhi  was 
named as Myer Supplier of the Year. Sustainability and 
community initiatives are also recognised at the Awards. 
Chanel  Australia  received  the  award  for ‘Outstanding 
Community Support by a Supplier’. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
enVironment

At Myer we remain committed to 
minimising the impact of our operations 
on the environment and integrating 
environmental sustainability and 
accountability throughout our business.

2012

Cardboard

4,106

tonnes
Recycled

carDboarD 
recycling
– tonnes

Fy09

Fy10

Fy11

Fy12

3,867

3,899

3,852

4,106

2012

Plastic

439

tonnes
Recycled

plastic  
recycling
– tonnes

Fy09

239

Fy10

Fy11

Fy12

469

380

439

Waste management and recycling
focus  on  recycling  and  waste 
We  continue  to 
management in our stores and support office, including 
reuse  and  recycling  of  paper,  cardboard,  plastic,  toner 
cartridges,  hangers,  security  hard  tags,  e-waste  and 
textiles. We report on the collection of paper-based and 
plastic recyclable materials, with a steady increase in the 
amount of total recyclables over the past four years. 

Our merchandise protection hard tag reuse and recycle 
program  has  also  provided  significant  environmental 
benefits,  with  tags  reused  up  to  12  times.  Since  the 
program  began  in  2010,  approximately  122  tonnes  of 
tags have been sorted, enabling reuse by our suppliers.

During 2012, we offered customers a service to recycle 
their  old  mattress  when  purchasing  a  new  mattress 
from Myer. Approximately 1,500 mattresses were saved 
from landfill and recycled as a result of the program.

delivering floor ready merchandise
Improving  the  ‘floor  ready’  state  of  our  merchandise, 
including having garments pre-hung, folded and tagged, 
improves  efficiency  and  has  positive  environmental 
impacts, including reducing packaging materials. In July 
2012, 60 percent of our signed suppliers complied with 
our ‘floor  ready’  standards,  compared  to  33  percent  in 
July 2011.

commitment to the Australian 
Packaging covenant
Myer  has  adopted  the  Australian  Packaging  Covenant 
(APC) Sustainable Packaging Guidelines and principles 
of  product  stewardship.  As  part  of  our  commitment 
to  the  APC,  we  are  focused  on  measuring  packaging 
waste  associated  with  our  Myer  Exclusive  Brands,  and 
taking  steps  to  either  eliminate  or  minimise  waste  by 
optimising  reuse  and  the  recyclability  of  packaging. 
This 
is  achieved  principally  through  modification 
of  packaging  design.  We  have  a  packaging  and 
recycling workgroup for identifying and implementing 
sustainable packaging solutions.

Supply chain initiatives
Supply chain initiatives have resulted in the delivery of 
environmental benefits. 

third-party  central 

returns  centre  processes 
Our 
soiled  or  damaged  merchandise,  preparing 
it  for 
on-selling  to  alternative  markets.  During  2012,  278 
tonnes  of  merchandise  was  on-sold.  A  program  to 
recycle  redundant  store  fixtures  was  also  introduced. 
Additionally, our supply chain function has focused on 
improvements in international container utilisation and 
efficiencies in transport.

S
u
S
t

A

I

N
A
B

I
l
I
t
y

M
y
e
r

A
N
N
u

A
L

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

2
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
boarD of Directors

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

01
howard mcDonald
Chairman (until 10 October 2012)  
Independent non-executive director
Member of the Board since 6 November
2006, retired 10 october 2012
Non-executive Chairman since 4 August 2009
Member – Human resources and  
remuneration Committee 
Chair – Nomination Committee 

Howard  brings  significant  retail  and  fashion 
experience to Myer, with 36 years of experience 
in consumer goods industries.
Howard  was  previously  Managing  Director 
of  the  Just  Group,  from  December  1997  to 
repositioned 
September  2006,  where  he 
and  expanded  the  Group.  In  2001,  he  led  the 
Just  Jeans  Group  into  Australia’s  first  public 
to  private  management  buyout  and  in  May 
2004 Just Group was re-listed on the ASX. Just 
Group  is  the  largest  specialty  apparel  retailer 
in Australasia with over 800 stores. Its stable of 
brands  includes  Just  Jeans,  Jay  Jays,  Jacqui  E, 
Portmans, Peter Alexander Sleepwear and Dotti.
Prior  to  this,  Howard  held  a  number  of  roles 
within the Pacific Dunlop Group across Footwear, 
Clothing  and Textiles,  and  Corporate,  including 
head  of  Corporate  Affairs  for  Pacific  Dunlop 
where he sat on the Management Boards. 
Howard’s  time  at  Pacific  Dunlop  culminated  
in  the  role  of  Managing  Director  of  Pacific 
Brands Clothing.
Howard holds a Bachelor of Economics degree 
from Monash University and is a Fellow of the 
Institute  of  Company  Directors. 
Australian 
Howard resides in Victoria and is 62 years of age.

Other current directorships
Howard is currently Chairman of Rodd & Gunn 
Australia Limited (a Myer supplier) and Rodd & 
Gunn New Zealand Limited.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

L
A

u
N
N
A

r
e
y
M

/

2
2

02
paul mcclintock AO
Chairman (from 10 October 2012) 
Independent non-executive director
Member of the Board since 8 August 2012
Appointed Chairman 10 october 2012
Chair – Nomination Committee  
(from 10 october 2012) 

Paul has considerable experience as a director, 
having held significant chairman and advisory 
positions across a broad range of industries, as 
well as government.
He is a professional Board member and is highly 
regarded  for  his  wide  and  varied  experience. 
From 2000 to 2003 he was Secretary to Cabinet 
and Head of the Cabinet Policy Unit, reporting 
to  the  Prime  Minister  on  Cabinet  process  and 
long-term policy formulation.
Paul’s former Board positions include Chairman 
Intoll, 
of  Symbion  Health,  Affinity  Health, 
Plutonic  Resources  and  Ashton  Mining,  and 
director of US based Homestake Mining. He was 
also  Chairman  of  the  Expert  Panel  of  the  Low 
Emissions Technology Demonstration Fund and 
the Woolcock Institute of Medical Research. 
Paul graduated in Arts and Law from the University 
of  Sydney  and  is  an  honorary  fellow  of  the 
Faculty of Medicine of that University. He resides 
in New South Wales and is 63 years of age.

Other current directorships
Paul is Chairman of Medibank Private Limited, 
the  COAG  Reform  Council,  Thales  Australia, 
I-Med  Network  and  the  Institute  of  Virology, 
and a director of Perpetual Limited. He is also 
a member of the Advisory Board of the NSW 
Public Service Commission. He has announced 
his intention to retire from the COAG Reform 
Council and Perpetual Limited.

03
rupert myer AM
Deputy Chairman 
Independent non-executive director
Member of the Board since 12 July 2006
Appointed Deputy Chairman 8 August 2012
Member – Audit, Finance and risk Committee
Member – Human resources and  
remuneration Committee
Member – Nomination Committee

Rupert  serves  as  a  non-executive  Chairman 
and director of a number of public, private and 
government  entities.  His  background  includes 
serving  in  roles  in  the  retail  and  property 
sector,  investment,  family  office  and  wealth 
management services and community sector.
Rupert  holds  a  Bachelor  of  Commerce 
(Honours)  degree 
from  the  University  of 
Melbourne  and  a  Master  of  Arts  from  the 
University of Cambridge and is a Fellow of the 
Australian  Institute  of  Company  Directors.  He 
became a Member of the Order of Australia in 
January 2005 for service to the arts, for support 
of  museums,  galleries  and  the  community 
through  a  range  of  philanthropic  and  service 
organisations.  Rupert  resides  in Victoria  and  is 
54 years of age.

Other current directorships
is  a  director  of  The  Myer  Family 
Rupert 
is 
Company  Ltd  and  AMCIL  Limited.  He 
Chairman  of  the  Australia  Council,  Chairman 
of  The  Opera  Australia  Capital  Fund  Limited 
and  Chairman  of  Kaldor  Public  Arts  Projects. 
He serves as a member of the Felton Bequests’ 
Committee,  as  a  board  member  of  Jawun 
Indigenous  Corporate  Partnerships,  The 
– 
Myer  Foundation  and 
the  University  of 
Melbourne Faculty of Business and Economics  
Advisory Board.

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
04
bernie brookes
Chief Executive Officer and Managing Director
Member of the Board since 12 July 2006

Bernie was appointed Chief Executive Officer 
and Managing Director of the Myer Group on 
2 June 2006.
Since  his  appointment,  Bernie  has  been 
responsible for the turnaround and rebuilding of 
the Myer business. He has led the development 
and  implementation  of  the  Myer  five-point 
strategic plan, repositioning the business to meet 
today’s  challenges  and  investing  for  the  future. 
Bernie  has  spent  over  35  years  working  within 
the retail industry in local and international roles 
in India and China.
Prior to joining Myer, Bernie was in a series of 
executive  roles  with  Woolworths  and  was  a 
chief architect of Woolworths’ Project Refresh, 
reducing  costs  by  more  than  $5  billion  over 
five years and reinvested the savings back into 
the business. His Woolworths experience also 
included  a  variety  of  general  management 
positions in three states across the Buying, IT, 
Marketing and Operations departments.
Bernie has also held a number of roles as president 
and executive of various industry organisations 
including  the  Retail  Traders  Association 
in 
Queensland  and  Victoria  and  President  of  the 
Queensland Grocery Association. He has assisted 
on  a  number  of  charitable  and  government 
ventures  and  committees.  Bernie  is  currently 
patron  of  the  Australian  Joe  Berry  Memorial 
Award  and  the  Australian  representative  judge 
of the World Retail Awards.
Bernie  holds  a  Bachelor  of  Arts  degree 
and  a  Diploma  of  Education  from  Macquarie 
University.  Bernie  resides  in Victoria  and  New 
South Wales and is 52 years of age.

Other current directorships
Bernie  is  a  director  of  the  Advisory  Board  of 
The Salvation Army.

05
anne brennan
Independent non-executive director
Member of the Board since 16 September 2009
Chair – Audit, Finance and risk Committee
Member – Human resources and remuneration 
Committee 
Member – Nomination Committee

Anne  brings  to  the  Myer  business  strong 
financial credentials and business experience. 
in  a  variety  of  senior 
Anne  has  worked 
management  roles  in  both  large  corporates 
and professional services firms.
During  Anne’s  executive  career,  she  was  the 
CFO  at  CSR  and  the  Finance  Director  at  the 
Coates  Group.  Prior  to  her  executive  roles, 

Anne  was  a  partner  in  three  professional 
services  firms:  KPMG,  Arthur  Andersen  and 
Ernst  &  Young.  She  has  more  than  20  years 
experience  in  audit,  corporate  finance  and 
transaction services. Anne was also a member 
of  the  national  executive  team  and  a  board 
member of Ernst & Young.
Anne  holds  a  Bachelor  of  Commerce 
(Honours)  degree  from  University  College 
Galway.  She  is  a  Fellow  of  the  Institute  of 
Chartered  Accountants  in  Australia  and  a 
Fellow of the Australian Institute of Company 
Directors.  Anne  resides  in  New  South  Wales 
and is 52 years of age.

Other current directorships
is  currently  a  director  of  Argo 
Anne 
Investments Limited, Charter Hall Group, Echo 
Entertainment Group Limited, Nufarm Limited, 
Rabobank  Australia 
Rabobank 
New  Zealand  and  Cuscal  Limited.  She  has 
announced  her  intention  to  retire  from  the 
Board of Cuscal Limited.

Limited, 

06
chris froggatt 
Independent non-executive director
Member of the Board since 9 December 2010
Chair – Human resources and remuneration 
Committee
Member – Nomination Committee 

Chris  was  appointed  as  a  non-executive 
director of Myer Holdings Limited in December 
2010.  Chris  has  a  broad  industry  background, 
including consumer branded products, retailing 
and hospitality, and covering industries such as 
beverage, food and confectionery through her 
appointments  at  Britvic,  Whitbread,  Diageo 
and Mars.
She  has  over  20  years’  executive  experience 
as  a  human  resources  specialist  in  leading 
international  companies,  including  Brambles 
Industries  plc  and  Brambles  Industries  Ltd, 
Whitbread  Group  plc,  Diageo  plc,  Mars  Inc. 
and  Unilever  NV.  Chris  has  recently  served 
on the Boards of Britvic plc and Sports Direct 
International  plc  and  as  an 
independent 
trustee  director  of  Berkeley  Square  Pension 
Trustee Company Limited.
Chris  holds  a  Bachelor  of  Arts  (Honours)  in 
English Literature from the University of Leeds 
(UK). Chris is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute 
of Personnel Development and a member of 
the Australian Institute of Company Directors. 
Chris  resides  in  New  South  Wales  and  is  54 
years of age.

Other current directorships
Chris  currently  serves  on  the  Board  of 
Goodman  Fielder  Limited  and  is  currently 
a  director  on  the  Board  of  the  Australian 
Chamber Orchestra.

07
peter hay 
Independent non-executive director
Member of the Board since 3 February 2010
Member – Audit, Finance and risk Committee 

Peter  has  a  strong  background  in  company 
law  and 
investment  banking  work,  with 
particular  expertise  in  relation  to  mergers 
and  acquisitions.  He  has  also  had  significant 
involvement  in  advising  governments  and 
government-owned enterprises. Peter was the 
Chief  Executive  of  law  firm  Freehills  (2000  to 
2005), where he had been partner since 1977.
Peter holds a Law Degree from the University 
of Melbourne and is a Fellow of the Australian 
Institute of Company Directors. Peter resides in 
Victoria and is 62 years of age.

Other current directorships
Peter is currently Chairman of Lazard Pty Ltd’s 
Advisory  Board,  and  a  director  of  Alumina 
Limited  (since  2002).  He  is  a  director  of 
Australia  and  New  Zealand  Banking  Group 
Limited  (since  2008),  and  a  director  of  GUD 
Holdings  Limited  (since  2009).  Peter  is  also  a 
member of the Australian Institute of Company 
Directors’  Corporate  Governance  Committee 
(since  2012)  and  a  part-time  member  of  the 
Takeovers Panel (since 2009). 
Peter is also a director of Epworth Foundation 
(since  2008)  and  Landcare  Australia  Ltd 
(since 2008).

08
ian morrice
Independent non-executive director
Member of the Board since 8 August 2012

Ian has over three decades of strong, international 
retail experience and strategic understanding of 
the retail sector.
He  has  held  significant  retail  roles,  including 
most  recently  as  Group  CEO  and  Managing 
Director,  The  Warehouse  Group  Limited  (NZ) 
from  2004  to  2011.  Ian  has  previously  held 
senior retail roles for some of the UK’s leading 
retailers  including  Managing  Director,  B  &  Q 
Warehouse (United Kingdom), Retail Director, 
Woolworths  (United  Kingdom)  and  senior 
roles with the Dixons Group (United Kingdom).
Ian  holds  a  Masters  of  Business  Administration 
from Cranfield University School of Management 
in the UK. He resides in Auckland, New Zealand 
and is 51 years of age.

Other current directorships
Ian  is  currently  a  director  of  Metcash  Limited 
and  an  adviser  to  the  Board  of  the  Spotlight 
group of companies.

M
y
e
r

A
N
N
u

A
L

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

2
3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
management team

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

04
greg travers
Executive General Manager Business Services 
and Office of the CEO

Greg  was  appointed  Myer’s  Director  of 
Strategic  Planning  and  Human  Resources  in 
June  2006  and  then  EGM  Business  Services 
in  November  2010.  In  August  2012,  he  was 
also appointed to lead the Office of the CEO. 
In  his  role,  Greg  is  responsible  for  the  Office 
of  the  CEO,  which  is  focused  on  the  review 
and  delivery  of  new  business  opportunities, 
the development of Myer‘s strategic planning 
framework,  Myer’s  program  management 
office and business efficiency objectives.
He  also  oversees  Myer’s  Human  Resources, 
Risk and Safety and Corporate Affairs. 
Greg has over 30 years of experience including 
with WMC Resources Ltd, Pratt Group and BHP.

01
bernie brookes
Chief Executive Officer and Managing Director

03
mark goddard
Executive General Manager Retail Development

Mark was appointed Executive General Manager 
Retail  Development  in  March  2012.  In  his  role 
Mark  is  responsible  for  driving  Myer’s  omni-
channel strategy which includes e-commerce, 
loyalty, and retail commercial services, as well as 
all parts of Myer’s Information Technology. 
Mark  is  a  highly  experienced  retailer,  most 
recently  in  the  role  of  CEO  at  Spotlight,  and 
was previously General Manager Merchandise 
at Kmart, and Acting Managing Director Kmart, 
and  he  has  also  held  senior  management 
positions at British Home Stores & Mothercare 
in the UK and Country Road in Australia.

Bernie was appointed Chief Executive Officer 
and Managing Director of Myer in June 2006. 
In his role, Bernie has been responsible for the 
transition  of  Myer  following  the  separation 
from  the  Coles  Group,  rebuilding  the  Myer 
business  under  private  ownership  and  now 
leading Myer as an ASX-listed public company. 
Bernie  has  spent  over  36  years  working  within 
the retail industry in local and international roles.

02
mark ashby
Chief Financial Officer

Mark  was  appointed  Chief  Financial  Officer 
(CFO) of Myer in January 2008. As CFO, Mark’s 
responsibilities  cover  all  accounting,  treasury 
taxation,  compliance  and 
management, 
internal  audit  and  procurement  aspects  of 
the business. 
Prior  to  joining  Myer,  Mark  was  CFO  of  Mitre 
10,  the  Finance  Director  of  Motorola  and  a 
Finance  Director  in  a  number  of  domestic 
and  international  organisations  in  retail  and 
technology.  Mark  is  a  fellow  of  CPA  Australia 
and  a  member  of  the  Australian  Institute  of 
Company Directors.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

L
A

u
N
N
A

r
e
y
M

/

4
2

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
05
timothy clark
Group General Manager Property, 
Store Development and Services

Tim has 29 years of retail experience and was 
appointed Director of IT in June 2006. Tim was 
responsible  for  IT  separation  of  Myer  from 
Coles  Myer,  including  the  replacement  of 
Myer’s  merchandise,  POS/EFT,  supply  chain, 
CCTV, and payroll systems. 
Tim  was  appointed  as  GGM  Property,  Store 
Development  and  Services 
January 
2011  and  is  responsible  for  Myer’s  property 
network, including new stores, in-store design 
developments, 
store 
refurbishments and facilities management. 
Tim  has  also  held  executive  roles  at  both 
Gazman Menswear and Crown Ltd. 

space  productivity, 

in 

06
Judy coomber
Group General Manager Merchandise

Judy  has  over  30  years  of  retail  experience 
and  was  appointed  GGM  Merchandise  in 
December  2010,  with  some  adjustments 
to  her  portfolio  in  September  2011.  Judy  is 
responsible  for  overseeing  all  areas  of  the 
Womenswear,  Miss  Shop,  Childrenswear, 
Intimates,  Shoes  and  Accessories  businesses 
as well as Cosmetics, Global Sourcing Offices, 
Quality  Assurance,  Quality  Control  and 
Concessions. At Myer, Judy has held a number 
of roles within stores and in the buying office. 
Judy  has  also  held  senior  merchandising 
roles  at  Roger  David,  Hallensteins  and  the 
Sportsgirl/Sportscraft  Group.  Judy  is  a  former 
non-executive  director  of  Ezibuy,  the  largest 
mail order business in Australasia.

07
megan foster
Group General Manager Marketing  
and Brand Development

Megan  was  appointed  GGM  Marketing  and 
Brand  Development 
in  November  2010. 
Megan 
is  responsible  for  advertising  and 
direct marketing, visual merchandising, public 
relations  and  events,  Emporium  magazine, 
myer.com.au creative, and social media, as well 
as brand strategy. 
Megan  has  22  years  of  retail  experience  and 
joined  Myer  in  June  2006  as  a  management 
In  April  2008,  Megan  was 
consultant. 
appointed  to  the  role  of  Director  Store 
Concepts and Design and as part of this role 
oversaw  the  redevelopment  of  the  flagship 
Myer Melbourne store. 

08
adam stapleton
Group General Manager Merchandise

Adam  has  17  years  of  industry  experience. 
Adam  was  appointed  to  the  role  of  GGM 
Merchandise  in  December  2010  with  some 
adjustments  to  his  portfolio  in  September 
2011. Adam is responsible for the Men’s, Home, 
Furniture, Entertainment, General Merchandise 
and  Toys  businesses  as  well  as  International 
and Domestic Logistics, Merchandise Planning 
and  Store  and  Business  Support.  Adam 
joined  Myer  in  2003,  and  has  held  a  number 
of  positions 
including  National  Manager  
of  Advertising  and  Loyalty  and  General 
Manager Marketing.
Prior  to 
for  
a  number  of  organisations  across  a  diverse 
range of industries, including Kodak, Accenture 
and ANZ.

joining  Myer,  Adam  worked 

09
louise tebbutt
Group General Manager Human Resources, 
Risk and Safety

Louise  was  appointed  to  the  role  of  GGM 
Human  Resources,  Risk  and  Safety  in  August 
2012,  after  leading  the  Human  Resources 
function  as  General  Manager  and  has  over 
industry  experience.  Louise 
17  years  of 
for  all  aspects  of  Myer’s 
is 
responsible 
including  organisational 
human  resources 
recruitment  and 
development, 
training, 
and  employee 
relations,  as  well  having 
accountability  for  risk  and  safety  for  the 
organisation.  Louise  joined  Myer  from  the 
Coles  Group  in  2006,  where  she  held  senior 
roles  in  a  number  of  businesses  including 
Coles Supermarkets and Target. 
is  a  director  of  the  Myer  Stores 
Louise 
Community  Fund  and  Chair  of  the  Myer 
Superannuation Policy Committee. 

10
tony sutton
General Manager Store Operations

Tony  oversees  the  operations  of  the  Myer 
store network, including our customer service 
strategy,  and  has  a  focus  on  operational 
efficiencies.  Tony  was  appointed  to 
lead 
the  Stores  team,  on  an  interim  basis,  on  18 
September 2012. 
Tony  is  a  career  retailer,  and  joined  Myer  in 
1992.  He  has  worked  cross  functionally  in  a 
number of roles, including store management, 
merchandise  and  marketing.  He  has  held  a 
number of senior roles in store management, 
including  his  most  recent  role  leading  the 
State  General  Manager  stores  team  for  the 
past two years.

11
marion rodwell
General Counsel and Company Secretary

litigation 

Marion  is  the  Company  Secretary  of  the 
Company.  Marion  was  appointed  Group 
General  Counsel  and  Company  Secretary  in 
2008.  Marion  has  over  20  years  of  corporate, 
and  governance 
commercial, 
experience. Prior to joining Myer, Marion held 
General Counsel and Company Secretary roles 
in  the  financial  services,  gaming  and  retail 
industries, including with Tattersall’s and IOOF. 
Marion holds a Bachelor of Laws and a Bachelor 
of Economics from Monash University, and is a 
member  of  the  Law  Institute  of  Victoria  and 
the Australian Corporate Lawyers Association. 
In 2010, Marion was awarded ACLA Australian 
Corporate Lawyer of the Year.

M
y
e
r

A
N
N
u

A
L

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

2
5

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate GovernanCe Statement 

Introduction

The Board of the Company is committed to achieving the highest 
standards of corporate governance. The Board is concerned to 
ensure that the Group is properly managed to protect and enhance 
shareholder interests, and that the Company, its directors, officers  
and employees operate in an appropriate environment of  
corporate governance. 

The Board has adopted a corporate governance framework 
comprising principles and policies that are consistent with the 
ASX Corporate Governance Council’s Corporate Governance Principles 
and Recommendations with 2010 Amendments (2nd Edition) 
(ASX Principles). This framework is designed to promote responsible 
management and assists the Board to discharge its corporate 
governance responsibilities on behalf of the Company’s shareholders.

The Group regularly reviews its policies and charters to ensure that 
they remain consistent with the Board’s objectives, current laws and 
best practice. The policies and charters referred to in this statement  
are available from the Corporate Governance page in the Investor 
Centre section of Myer’s website (www.myer.com.au/investor). 

This statement outlines the Group’s main corporate governance 
practices and policies in place throughout the financial year and  
at the date of this report. It is structured as follows:
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›
 › diversity at Myer.

the Board and management; 
Board composition and director tenure; 
the Board Committees; 
risk management; 
key governance policies; and 

The Company has followed the recommendations set out in the ASX 
Principles during the reporting period. The table on page 38 indicates 
where specific ASX Principles are discussed in this statement. 

Part 1 – The Board and management 

Relevant documents  
– available from myer.com.au/investor
 ›
 › Nomination Committee Charter 

Board Charter and relationship with management

1.1 Role and responsibilities of the Board
The Board has ultimate responsibility for setting policy regarding the 
business and affairs of the Company for the benefit of shareholders 
and other stakeholders. 

The role of the Board includes: 
 ›

representing and serving the interests of shareholders by 
overseeing and appraising the Company’s strategies, policies  
and performance. This includes overseeing the financial and 
human resources the Company has in place to meet its  
objectives and reviewing management performance; 
 › protecting and optimising Company performance and  

building sustainable value for shareholders in accordance  
with any duties and obligations imposed on the Board by  
law and the Company’s Constitution and within a framework  
of prudent and effective controls that enable risk to be  
assessed and managed; 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

6
2

 ›

 ›

setting, reviewing and ensuring compliance with the Company’s 
values and governance framework (including establishing and 
observing high ethical standards); and 
ensuring that shareholders are kept informed of the Company’s 
performance and major developments affecting its state of affairs. 

The Board has adopted the ‘Board Charter and relationship with 
management’ (Board Charter) to provide a framework for its effective 
operation. The Board Charter outlines the manner in which the Board’s 
constitutional powers and responsibilities will be exercised and 
discharged, having regard to principles of good corporate governance, 
best practice and applicable laws. 

The Board Charter clearly sets out the roles, responsibilities and 
functions of the Board, including those matters specifically  
reserved for the Board or the Board Committees. In addition,  
the Board Charter addresses:
 ›
 ›

the role and responsibilities of the Chairman and the CEO; 
the relationship and interaction between the Board and 
management; and 

 › delegation by the Board to Board Committees and management. 

As set out in the Board Charter, the responsibilities of the 
Board include:
 › monitoring corporate performance and the implementation  

 ›

of strategy and policy; 
selecting, appointing and evaluating the performance of, 
determining the remuneration of, and planning the succession  
of the CEO; 

 › on recommendation of the CEO, selecting, appointing and 

reviewing the performance of the Chief Financial Officer (CFO)  
and other senior executives; 
contributing to and approving management’s development  
of corporate strategy, including setting performance objectives 
and approving operating budgets; 
reviewing, ratifying and monitoring systems of risk management 
and internal control and ethical and legal compliance; 
approving major capital expenditure, acquisitions and divestments, 
and monitoring capital management;

 ›

 ›

 ›

 › monitoring and reviewing management processes; and 
 › developing and reviewing corporate governance principles  

and policies.

In respect of diversity, the Board’s responsibilities include: 
 ›
 ›

reviewing and approving the Company’s diversity policy; and 
establishing measurable objectives for achieving diversity across 
the Group, and annually assessing both the objectives and progress 
towards achieving them.

1.2 The Chairman, CEO and management 
The roles of Chairman and CEO are separate, and the Board Charter 
sets out responsibilities for each office. The roles of Chairman and 
CEO are not exercised by the same individual. The Board Charter 
states that the Chairman should be an independent non-executive 
director. Howard McDonald (Chairman until 10 October 2012) and 
Paul McClintock AO (Chairman from 10 October 2012) are both 
independent non-executive directors. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Chairman’s responsibilities include:
representing the Board to shareholders; 
 ›
 › providing leadership to the Board and Myer; 
 ›
 › promoting constructive and respectful relationships between  

ensuring that the Board operates efficiently and effectively; and 

the Board and management.

The management of the Company is conducted by, or under 
the supervision of, the CEO as directed by the Board. The CEO is 
responsible for implementing the strategic objectives, plans and 
budgets approved by the Board. The Board approves corporate 
objectives for the CEO to satisfy and, in conjunction with the CEO, 
develops the duties and responsibilities of the CEO. 

Management is accountable to the Board, and is required to  
provide the Board with information in a form, timeframe and quality 
that enables the Board to discharge its duties effectively. Directors 
are entitled to request additional information at any time that they 
consider appropriate. 

The Nomination Committee (and formerly the Nomination and 
Remuneration Committee) assists in developing and implementing 
plans for identifying, assessing and enhancing director competencies. 
As part of this development, in August 2011, the directors participated 
in a workshop specifically tailored for the Company in relation to 
corporate governance. 

The Human Resources and Remuneration Committee assists in the 
review and recommendation of arrangements for directors, the CEO 
and executives in relation to remuneration and benefits, and reviews 
the performance of those individuals and the reward interface. 
The Committee also reviews all significant human resource issues, 
including development and succession planning.

Review of senior executives 
The Human Resources and Remuneration Committee is responsible 
for the review of the senior management assessment processes from 
time to time to ensure that they remain consistent with the Board’s 
overall objectives for the business.

1.3 Performance assessments 
Review of the Board, Board Committees  
and individual directors 
The Board recognises that regular reviews of its effectiveness and 
performance are key to the improvement of the governance of 
the Company. Accordingly, the Board, with the assistance of the 
Nomination Committee as required, has committed to an annual 
review and evaluation of the performance of the Board, the Board 
Committees and each individual Director. 

The review and evaluation undertaken in the reporting period is 
described below. 

The Board and each Board Committee conducted a review of their 
effectiveness and performance in September 2011. During the 
reporting period, the Board and each Board Committee also reviewed 
and updated their respective Charters. In addition, the Board assessed 
the relationship and interaction between the Board and management. 

In September 2011, the Chairman conducted the annual review of 
individual directors. Each director completed a Board review and 
assessment document, and met privately with the Chairman to  
discuss the assessment. In addition to the annual review, the  
Chairman regularly provides informal feedback to individual directors. 

A formal performance evaluation and assessment of the effectiveness 
of the Board, the Board Committees and individual directors was 
conducted during January to March 2012 by an external adviser 
with corporate governance expertise. The results of the review were 
discussed in detail with the Board, and action items identified are 
being addressed as part of a process of ongoing communication 
between the Board and management. 

In May 2012, the Board approved the establishment of two Board 
Committees – the Human Resources and Remuneration Committee 
and the Nomination Committee – to replace the existing Nomination 
and Remuneration Committee. The establishment of two separate 
committees was considered appropriate from a governance 
perspective, and recognises the different functions performed by each 
committee. Each new committee has adopted a new written Charter. 

All senior executives undergo a performance and development review 
on an annual basis. This review process involves the following: 
 ›

each senior executive is assessed against a set of key performance 
criteria. These criteria include both financial and non-financial 
performance measures;
at the end of each financial year, all senior executives meet with 
their manager to discuss their performance over the previous year; 
and

 ›

 › upon the completion of the performance appraisal meeting, each 
senior executive is provided with feedback on their performance 
and a rating is determined based on that performance. As well as 
the review of performance, where appropriate, a development plan 
is also agreed to support the ongoing contribution of the executive 
to the needs of the business. 

A performance evaluation for senior executives which accords 
with the process described above has taken place during this 
reporting period.

It is the role of the Board to review the performance of the CEO and 
to review the assessments made by the CEO of the performance 
of his direct reports. On 10 August 2011, the Company announced 
the renewal of Bernie Brookes’ contract as the Company’s CEO and 
Managing Director until 31 August 2014. An important component  
of this decision was the Board’s assessment of Mr Brookes’ 
performance as CEO. 

1.4 Remuneration arrangements 
The remuneration of each director is set out in the Remuneration 
Report, which forms part of the Directors’ Report and is presented  
on pages 44 to 59.

The Company distinguishes the structure of non-executive directors’ 
remuneration from that of executive directors and senior executives. 
The Company does not have any schemes for retirement benefits for 
non-executive directors. 

Please refer to the Remuneration Report for further information. 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

2
7

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1.5  Board and Board Committee meetings
The number of meetings of the Board and of each Board Committee held during the period ended 28 July 2012, and the number of meetings 
attended by each director and committee member are set out in the Directors’ Report, at page 40.

1.6  Independent professional advice
Under the Board Charter, the Board collectively and each director individually are entitled to seek independent professional advice at the 
Company’s expense in connection with their duties and responsibilities, subject to the approval of the Chairman or the Board. 

Under their respective Charters, each of the Board Committees is entitled to seek independent professional advice on any matter pertaining  
to the powers, duties or responsibilities of the committee. 

1.7  Company Secretary 
The Company Secretary has an important role in supporting the effectiveness of the Board by monitoring that Board policy and procedures  
are followed, and co-ordinating the completion and despatch of Board agendas and materials in a timely manner. All directors have direct access 
to the Company Secretary.

The Company Secretary is also responsible for communication with regulatory bodies and the ASX, and all statutory and other filings. 

Marion Rodwell is the Company Secretary of the Company. Her experience and qualifications are set out on page 25 of this Annual Report. 

Part 2 – Board composition and director tenure 

Relevant documents – available from myer.com.au/investor
 ›
 › Nomination Committee Charter

Board Charter and relationship with management 

2.1  Composition of the Board 
As at the date of this Report, the Board comprises eight directors. The majority of the Board are independent non-executive directors. 

Name 

Howard McDonald

Paul McClintock AO

Rupert Myer AM

Bernie Brookes

Anne Brennan

Chris Froggatt

Peter Hay 

Ian Morrice

Position 

Chairman until 10 October 2012  
Independent Non-Executive Director

Chairman from 10 October 2012 
Independent Non-Executive Director

Deputy Chairman from 8 August 2012 
Independent Non-Executive Director

CEO and Managing Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

Appointed 

6 November 20061

8 August 2012

12 July 2006

12 July 2006

16 September 2009

9 December 2010

3 February 2010

8 August 2012

1   H McDonald was appointed a director on 6 November 2006, and Chairman on 4 August 2009.

Tom Flood retired from the Board with effect from 11 April 2012. Paul McClintock AO and Ian Morrice were appointed as directors on 8 August 2012. 
All other directors served as directors for the entire reporting period. 

Howard McDonald will retire from the Board at the conclusion of the Board meeting on 10 October 2012, and will be succeeded as Chairman  
by Paul McClintock AO at that time.

Details of the skills, qualifications, experience, expertise and special responsibilities of each current director are set out on pages 22 to 23 of this 
Annual Report. 

2.2 Skills, experience, expertise and diversity of directors 
The Board, together with the Nomination Committee, determines the size and composition of the Board, subject to the Company’s Constitution. 
The Company’s Constitution states that the minimum number of directors is four and the maximum is fixed by the directors, but may not be 
more than 12. 

The Board, together with the Nomination Committee, reviews the composition of the Board and the skills and experience represented by 
the directors on the Board, and determines whether the composition and mix of those skills remain appropriate for the Company’s strategy. 
Additional information about the Nomination Committee’s responsibilities in relation to the size and composition of the Board is set out at 
section 3.4. 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

8
2

Corporate Governance Statement continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Board recognises that a Board comprising directors with a 
diverse range of backgrounds, skills and experience facilitates robust 
discussion and decision-making, and enables the Board to discharge its 
responsibilities effectively. It is intended that the Board will comprise a 
majority of independent non-executive directors and over time comprise 
directors from a diverse range of backgrounds, with complementary skills 
and experience. This will ensure that the composition of the Board reflects 
a range of expertise, experience and diversity appropriate to the Group’s 
business and strategies. 

On 8 August 2012, the Company appointed two new independent 
non-executive directors, Mr Paul McClintock AO and Mr Ian Morrice. 
Mr McClintock has considerable experience as a director, having 
held significant chairman and advisory positions across a broad 
range of industries, as well as government. Mr McClintock succeeded 
Mr Howard McDonald as Chairman of the Board from 10 October 
2012. Mr Morrice has strong, international expertise and strategic 
understanding of the retail sector. The appointment of these two  
new directors complements the existing diverse skills and experience 
of the Myer Board.

The range of backgrounds, skills and expertise currently represented 
on the Board includes experience in senior roles in retail, hospitality, 
finance, government, human resources, law, and mergers and 
acquisitions, as well as qualifications across a range of fields, including 
business administration, commerce, law and the humanities. The 
directors also have expertise in brand building and marketing, as well 
as having international experience.

2.3   Appointment of new directors and re-election 

of directors 

The Company’s policy and procedure for selection and appointment 
of new directors and re-election of directors is set out in the 
Nomination Committee Charter. 

When identifying potential candidates for Board appointment, factors 
that may be considered include:
 ›

the skills, experience, expertise and personal qualities that will best 
complement Board effectiveness;
the capability of the candidate to devote the necessary time and 
commitment to the role; and

 ›

 › potential conflicts of interest and independence.

Mr McClintock and Mr Morrice will each offer themselves for election 
by the Company’s shareholders at the 2012 AGM. 

There is no specific term of office for non-executive directors. 
In accordance with the ASX Listing Rules and the Company’s 
Constitution, all non-executive directors must retire from office no 
later than the third AGM following their last election. Where eligible, a 
director may stand for re-election. The CEO will not retire by rotation. 

Prior to each AGM, the Board determines whether to recommend to 
shareholders to vote in favour of the election of any new director and 
the re-election of each director standing for re-election. 

Induction and education
New directors are provided with a letter of appointment setting out 
the Company’s expectations, their responsibilities and rights and the 
terms and conditions of their tenure.

All new directors and senior executives participate in an induction 
program. New directors receive an induction appropriate to their 
experience to enable them to actively participate in decision-making 
as soon as possible, including familiarisation with the operation of the 
Board and its Committees and financial, strategic, operations and risk 
management issues. In addition, the Company arranges continuing 
education and training for the directors. 

The Nomination Committee is responsible for ensuring that an 
effective induction process is in place for any newly appointed 
director, and to regularly review its effectiveness. 

2.4  Directors’ independence
The Board considers the independence of its non-executive directors 
each year. 

Guidelines and materiality thresholds  
for determining independence
The Board Charter sets out guidelines and materiality thresholds that 
the Board has adopted to assist in determining the independence 
of directors. 

The Board only considers directors to be independent where they 
are independent of management and free of any business or other 
relationship that could materially interfere with, or could reasonably 
be perceived to interfere with, the exercise of their unfettered and 
independent judgement. 

The identification of potential director candidates may be assisted by 
the use of external search organisations as appropriate. All directors are 
consulted and provided with detailed information about potential new 
directors. Any new appointment is approved by the Board in accordance 
with the Company’s Constitution. Any new directors appointed by the 
Board must retire and offer themselves for election by the Company’s 
shareholders at the next Annual General Meeting (AGM).

As a guideline for determining the independence of directors, the 
Board has regard to the relationships set out in Box 2.1 of the ASX 
Principles. In general, directors will be considered to be independent  
if they are not members of management and they: 
 ›

are not a substantial shareholder of the Company, or an officer of, 
or otherwise associated directly with, a substantial shareholder 
of the Company;

The Board invested a number of months in identifying, selecting and 
appointing each of Mr McClintock and Mr Morrice as new directors of 
the Company. In respect of each appointment, the Board undertook a 
formal selection process and engaged an executive search firm to assist 
in this process. The Board considered the requisite criteria for potential 
director candidates, including formal qualifications and expertise, and 
the mix of experience, personal qualities and diversity that would best 
complement the Board’s existing diverse skills and experience, thus 
ensuring that the Board continues to operate and discharge its duties 
effectively. The Board also considered the independence and potential 
conflicts of interests of potential director candidates. 

 › have not, within the last three years, been employed in an 

 ›

 ›

executive capacity by the Company or another Group member;
except in connection with reorganisations within the Group, 
have not within the last three years been a principal or employee 
of a material professional adviser or a material consultant to the 
Company or another Group member;
are not a material supplier to, or customer of the Company or 
another Group member or an officer of or otherwise associated 
directly or indirectly with a material supplier or customer of the 
Company; and 

 › have no material contractual relationship with the Company or 

another Group member, other than as a director of the Company. 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

2
9

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Board considers thresholds of materiality for the purposes of 
assessing ‘independence’ on a case-by-case basis, having regard 
to both quantitative and qualitative principles. Without limiting 
the Board’s discretion, the Board has adopted the following 
quantitative guidelines:
 ›

The Board will determine the appropriate base to apply 
(e.g. revenue, equity or expenses) in the context of each situation.
In general, the Board will consider an affiliation with a business 
that accounts for less than 5 percent of the relevant base to be 
immaterial for the purposes of determining independence. Where 
this threshold is exceeded, the Board will review the materiality  
of the particular circumstance with respect to the independence  
of the particular director.
The Board will review any holding of 5 percent or more of the 
Company’s shares, and will generally consider a holding of 
10 percent or more of the Company’s shares to be material.

 ›

 ›

The Board will also undertake a qualitative assessment of 
independence, which is an overriding requirement for independence. 
Specifically, the Board will consider whether there are any factors 
or considerations which may mean that the director’s interest, 
business or relationship (even if it does not trigger the quantitative 
requirements discussed above) could, or could reasonably be 
perceived to, materially interfere with the director’s ability to act  
in the best interests of the Company. 

Assessment of the independence of the Company’s directors
The Board currently comprises eight directors, seven of whom 
are non-executive directors. At the date of signing the Directors’ 
Report, it is the Board’s view that each of its non-executive directors 
is independent. 

Directors did not participate in deliberations about or vote in relation  
to their own independence.

Details of the relationships affecting director independence and 
independent status are set out below. 

Part 3 – Board Committees 

Board Charter and relationship with management 

Relevant documents  
– available from myer.com.au/investor
 ›
 › Audit, Finance and Risk Committee Charter
 › Human Resources and Remuneration Committee Charter 
 › Nomination Committee Charter 

3.1  Introduction 
The Board has established three committees to streamline the 
discharge of its duties and responsibilities, and to allow detailed 
consideration of complex matters. 

In May 2012, the Board approved the establishment of two Board 
Committees – the Human Resources and Remuneration Committee 
and the Nomination Committee – to replace the existing Nomination 
and Remuneration Committee. The Nomination and Remuneration 
Committee had been in existence since the public listing of the 
Company in 2009. The establishment of two separate committees 
was considered appropriate from a governance perspective, and 
recognises the different functions performed by each committee. 

The current Board Committees are: 
 ›
 ›
 ›

the Audit, Finance and Risk Committee; 
the Human Resources and Remuneration Committee; and 
the Nomination Committee. 

Each Board Committee has a written Charter that sets out its role and 
responsibilities, composition and membership requirements, and the 
manner in which the committee is to operate. 

Each Charter requires that the committee consist only of non-
executive directors, with a majority of independent directors. The 
current members of all three Board Committees are all independent 
non-executive directors. 

Howard McDonald 
Mr McDonald was appointed a director of the Company in November 
2006 and Chairman in August 2009. 

Details of committee members’ attendance at committee meetings 
(including at meetings of the former Nomination and Remuneration 
Committee) are set out in the Directors’ Report at page 40.

Mr McDonald is currently the Chairman and a shareholder of Rodd 
& Gunn Australia Limited, a Myer supplier. For the financial year 
ended 28 July 2012, the percentage of the Group’s total sales value 
represented by Rodd & Gunn was less than 0.5 percent. The total sales 
are significantly below the relevant quantitative materiality threshold 
adopted by the Board as a guideline for director independence. 
Consistent with the Board Charter, in addition to this quantitative 
assessment, the Board has also considered qualitative factors 
relevant to Mr McDonald’s independence. Having considered these 
quantitative and qualitative principles, the Board considers that 
Mr McDonald’s relationship with Rodd & Gunn is not material to 
his independence. The Board has therefore determined that  
Mr McDonald is an independent director. 

Appropriate governance arrangements are also in place to ensure 
that Mr McDonald does not participate in any deliberations or matters 
brought before the Board that relate directly to Rodd & Gunn. If the 
Board were to consider such matters, Mr McDonald would leave the 
Board meeting. 

All directors are invited to attend committee meetings. 
Non-committee members, including members of management,  
may also attend all or part of a meeting of the committee at the 
invitation of the committee chair. 

3.2  Audit, Finance and Risk Committee
Composition 
The current composition of the Audit, Finance and Risk Committee is:

Chair 

Members 

Anne Brennan 

Peter Hay (from 16 May 2012)

Rupert Myer AM

Tom Flood was a member of the Committee until his retirement as  
a director on 11 April 2012. 

All Committee members are financially literate and have an 
appropriate understanding of the industries in which the Group 
operates. The Chair of the Committee is an independent non-
executive director, and is not the Chair of the Board. 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

0
3

Corporate Governance Statement continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Role and responsibilities 
The Committee’s key responsibilities and functions are to:
 › oversee the Company’s relationship with the external auditor 

and the external audit function generally; 

 › oversee the Company’s relationship with the internal auditor 

and the internal audit function generally; 

 › oversee the preparation of financial statements and reports; 
 › oversee the Company’s financial controls and systems; and 
 › manage the process of identification and management of risk. 

Further information about the Company’s risk management 
framework, external auditor, internal audit and Board assurances 
on financial reporting risks is set out in Part 4.

Rights of access and authority 
The Committee has rights of access to management and to auditors 
(external and internal) without management present, and rights to 
seek explanations and additional information from both management 
and auditors. Whilst the internal audit function reports to senior 
management, it is acknowledged that the internal auditors also 
report directly to the Committee.

In addition, the Committee is entitled to seek independent 
professional advice (discussed at section 1.6 above)

3.3  Human Resources and Remuneration Committee 
Composition
The current composition of the Human Resources and Remuneration 
Committee is:

Chair 

Members 

Chris Froggatt 

Anne Brennan 

Howard McDonald  
(until 10 October 2012)

Rupert Myer AM

Howard McDonald will retire from the Committee upon his retirement 
from the Board on 10 October 2012. 

Role and responsibilities
The responsibilities of the Committee include:
 ›

 ›

 ›

 ›

to review and recommend arrangements for the CEO, executives 
reporting to the CEO, and senior management; 
to review major changes and developments in the Company’s 
remuneration, recruitment, retention and termination policies 
and procedures for senior management, remuneration policies, 
superannuation arrangements, human resource practices and 
employee relations strategies for the Group; 
to review the senior management performance assessment 
processes, and the annual results of those assessments; 
in respect of the Company’s employee equity incentive plans, to:
–  review and recommend to the Board any major changes  

or developments; 

–  review and determine performance hurdles, eligibility criteria, 

and terms of offers; and 

– administer the operation of the plans; 

 ›

 ›
 ›

 ›

 ›

to review and recommend to the Board the remuneration 
arrangements for the Chairman and the non-executive directors;
to review and recommend to the Board the remuneration report; 
to review and facilitate shareholder and other stakeholder 
engagement in relation to the Company’s remuneration policies 
and practices; 
at least annually, to review and report on the relative proportion  
of women and men in the workforce at all levels of Myer; and 
to review remuneration by gender and consider whether any pay 
gap exists as a result of gender difference and where relevant 
provide any recommendations to the Board. 

Remuneration policy 
In discharging its responsibilities, the Committee must have regard  
to the following policy objectives:
 ›

to ensure that the Company’s remuneration structures are 
equitable and aligned with the long-term interests of the Company 
and its shareholders;
to attract and retain skilled executives;
to structure short and long-term incentives that are challenging 
and linked to the creation of sustainable shareholder returns; and
to ensure that any termination benefits are justified and appropriate.

 ›
 ›

 ›

Access to senior executives
In addition to access to independent advisers (discussed at section 
1.6 above), the Committee may seek input from senior executives 
of the Company on remuneration policies, subject to the principle 
that no senior executive should be directly involved in deciding their 
own remuneration. 

3.4  Nomination Committee

Composition
The current composition of the Nomination Committee is:

Chair 

Members 

Howard McDonald  
(until 10 October 2012)

Paul McClintock AO 
(from 10 October 2012)

Anne Brennan 

Chris Froggatt 

Rupert Myer AM

Howard McDonald will retire as Chair of the Committee upon his 
retirement from the Board on 10 October 2012. 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

3
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Role and responsibilities
The responsibilities of the Committee include:
 ›

to review and recommend to the Board the size and composition 
of the Board, including the succession of the Chairman and CEO, 
and whether Board succession plans are in place to maintain an 
appropriate mix of skills, experience, expertise and diversity on 
the Board; 
to review and recommend to the Board the criteria for Board 
membership, including assessment of necessary and desirable 
competencies of Board members to maintain an appropriate mix 
of skills, experience, expertise and diversity on the Board; 
to assist the Board to assess the performance of the Board, its 
committees and individual directors, and in developing and 
implementing plans for identifying, assessing and enhancing 
director competencies; and 
to ensure that an effective induction process is in place for any 
newly appointed director and regularly review its effectiveness. 

 ›

 ›

 ›

3.5  Previous Board Committee – Nomination and 
Remuneration Committee
The composition of the previous Nomination and Remuneration 
Committee (which was replaced by the Human Resources and 
Remuneration Committee and the Nomination Committee in 
May 2012) was as follows:

Chair 

Members 

Chris Froggatt

Anne Brennan 

Howard McDonald 

Rupert Myer AM

The role and responsibilities of the Nomination and Remuneration 
Committee have been transferred to either the Human Resources and 
Remuneration Committee or the Nomination Committee.

Part 4 – Risk management

Relevant documents  
– available from myer.com.au/investor
 ›
 › Audit, Finance and Risk Committee Charter (including External 

Risk Management Policy 

Audit Policy)

4.1  Recognition and management of risk 
The Company recognises risk management as an integral component 
of good corporate governance and fundamental in achieving its 
strategic and operational objectives.

The Board is ultimately responsible for identifying and assessing 
internal and external risks that may impact the Company in achieving 
its strategic objectives. The Board is responsible for determining 
the Company’s risk appetite, overseeing the development and 
implementation of the risk management framework and maintaining 
an adequate monitoring and reporting mechanism. 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

2
3

The Board has delegated coordination of risk oversight to the Audit, 
Finance and Risk Committee. The Committee’s risk management 
responsibilities are to review and report to the Board as to whether: 
the Company’s ongoing risk management program effectively 
 ›
identifies all areas of potential risk; 
adequate policies and procedures have been designed and 
implemented to manage identified risks; 
a regular program of audits is undertaken to test the adequacy  
of and compliance with prescribed policies; and 

 ›

 ›

 › proper remedial action is undertaken to redress areas of weakness. 

The Company has adopted a Risk Management Policy that applies to 
all Group employees, and to contractors and consultants working on 
behalf of the Group. Management monitor and report on material risks 
identified through the internal and external audit process. 

4.2  Risk management framework 
The Company has adopted an enterprise-wide framework that 
incorporates a system of risk oversight, risk management and internal 
control designed to identify, assess, monitor and manage risks 
consistent with AS/NZS ISO 31000:2009 Risk Management Principles 
and Guidelines and provides Myer management with a consistent 
approach to recognising and managing risks. The Company applies 
risk management in a well-defined, integrated framework that 
promotes awareness of risks and an understanding of the Company’s 
risk tolerances. This enables a systematic approach to risk identification 
and leverage of any opportunities, and provides treatment strategies 
to manage, transfer and avoid risks.

The Board reviews and approves the risk management framework  
and risk appetite on an annual basis.

4.3  External auditor 
The Audit, Finance and Risk Committee is responsible for overseeing 
the Company’s External Audit Policy. The Committee has the 
responsibility and authority for the appointment, removal or 
re-appointment and remuneration of the external auditor, as well 
as evaluating its effectiveness and independence.

The Committee reviews the appointment of the external auditor 
annually. In addition, the Committee reviews and assesses the 
independence of the external auditor, including any relationships with 
the Company or any other entity that may impair, or appear to impair, 
the external auditor’s independent judgement or independence in 
respect of the Company.

The external audit engagement partner is required to rotate at least 
once every five years. PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC) was reappointed 
as the external auditor in 2009. 

The external auditor will attend the AGM and be available to answer 
shareholder questions about the conduct of the audit and the 
preparation and content of the Auditor’s Report.

4.4  Internal audit 
A separate internal audit division has been established and is overseen 
by an Assurance Manager who reports through to the CFO and liaises 
directly with the Audit, Finance and Risk Committee. 

The internal audit division carries out regular systematic monitoring  
of control activities and reports to relevant business unit management 
and the Audit, Finance and Risk Committee. 

Corporate Governance Statement continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4.5  Board assurances on financial reporting risks 
The Board has received assurance from the CEO and the CFO that 
the declaration provided in accordance with section 295A of the 
Corporations Act is founded on a sound system of risk management 
and internal compliance and control systems, and that the systems 
are operating effectively in all material respects in relation to financial 
reporting risks.

The Code encourages employees to report unethical practices, or 
breaches of the Code, Company policies or the law. The Company 
has ‘whistleblower’ protections for those who report unacceptable 
behaviour in good faith. 

The Company regularly reviews the Code, and adopted a revised  
Code in August 2011. Team members are required to undertake 
training and acknowledge acceptance of the Code on an annual basis. 

The CEO and the CFO made declarations to the Board (among other 
things) to the following effect:
 ›

that, in their opinion, the Group’s financial statements and notes 
for the financial year give a true and fair view of the financial 
position and the performance of the Company and the Group 
and are in accordance with the Corporations Act and relevant 
accounting standards;
that the above statement is founded on a sound system of risk 
management and internal compliance and control systems which 
implement the policies adopted by the Board (either directly or 
through delegation to senior executives); and
that the Company’s risk management and internal compliance and 
control systems, to the extent that they relate to financial reporting, 
are operating efficiently and effectively in all material respects.

 ›

 ›

Part 5 – Key governance policies

Relevant documents  
– available from myer.com.au/investor
 › Code of Business Conduct
 › Continuous Disclosure Policy 
 › Guidelines for Dealing in Securities 
 ›

Shareholder Communication Strategy 

5.1  Code of Business Conduct 
The Company is committed to the highest level of integrity and ethical 
standards in all business practices. All Group employees, directors 
and contractors must comply with the Company’s Code of Business 
Conduct (Code). The Code applies to all business activities and 
dealings with employees, customers, suppliers, shareholders and other 
external stakeholders. The objectives of the Code are to:
 › provide clear guidance on and benchmarks for appropriate 

 ›

 ›

professional and ethical behaviour;
reinforce the requirement for compliance with Company policies 
and legal requirements; 
support Myer’s business reputation through the behaviour of its 
people; and 

 › make directors and team members aware of their responsibilities 

and consequences if they breach the Code.

The Code outlines how the Group expects its directors and employees 
to behave and conduct business in a range of circumstances, 
including actual or potential conflicts of interest. The Code requires 
awareness of, and compliance with, laws and regulations relating to 
the Group’s operations, including fair trading, occupational health 
and safety, equal opportunity and anti-discrimination, privacy, 
employment practices and securities trading. 

5.2  Continuous disclosure 
The Company’s policy is to strictly comply with its obligations under 
the Corporations Act and the ASX Listing Rules to keep the market 
fully informed of information which may have a material effect on 
the price or value of the Company’s shares. The Company discharges 
these obligations by releasing information in ASX announcements 
and by disclosure of other relevant documents to shareholders 
(eg, annual reports).

The Company’s Continuous Disclosure Policy is designed to ensure 
the timely release of material price-sensitive information to the 
market. This policy establishes procedures to ensure that directors and 
management are aware of the Company’s disclosure obligations and 
procedures, and have accountability for the Company’s compliance 
with those obligations. 

The Company provides continuous disclosure training to all directors 
and senior management. It is a standing agenda item at all Board 
meetings, Board Committee meetings and senior management 
meetings to consider whether any matters reported to or discussed 
at the meeting should be disclosed to the market pursuant to the 
Company’s continuous disclosure obligations.

All general managers and divisional heads are required to have 
appropriate procedures in place within their areas of responsibility  
to ensure that all relevant information is reported to them immediately 
to be considered in accordance with the Continuous Disclosure Policy.

The Company has established a Continuous Disclosure Committee, 
which is comprised of the CEO, the CFO and the General Counsel  
and Company Secretary. The role of the Continuous Disclosure 
Committee is to:
 ›

review all potentially material price-sensitive information  
of which management or the Board become aware;

 › determine whether any of that information is required to be 

 ›

 ›

disclosed to the ASX; 
co-ordinate the actual form of disclosure with the relevant  
members of management; and 
review and respond to any infringement notice or written 
statement of reasons issued to the Company by ASIC. 

All deliberations of the Committee are shared without delay with the 
Chairman or, in the Chairman’s absence, the Chair of the Audit, Finance 
and Risk Committee.

The Company has nominated the Company Secretary as the person 
with the primary responsibility for all communication with the ASX.

The Board regularly reviews the Continuous Disclosure Policy, and 
adopted a revised policy in July 2012. 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

3
3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5.3  Securities trading 
The Company’s Guidelines for Dealing in Securities (Guidelines)  
apply to all directors and employees of the Group. The purpose  
of the Guidelines is to:
 ›

explain the types of conduct prohibited under the Corporations 
Act in relation to dealing in securities; and 
establish a best practice procedure for dealing in the 
Company’s securities.

 ›

As an overriding principle, directors, employees and their associates 
must not deal in the Company’s securities if they are in possession  
of price sensitive or ‘inside’ information. 

In addition, directors, specified senior executives and their associates 
(Relevant Persons) must not deal in the Company’s securities during 
‘blackout periods’. ‘Blackout periods’ include periods prior to the release 
of the Company’s half year and full year results. 

Relevant Persons are permitted to deal in the Company’s securities 
during certain ‘trading windows’, subject to complying with 
notification requirements. ‘Trading windows’ include periods following 
the release of the Company’s half year and full year results, and the 
AGM. Outside of ‘trading windows’, Relevant Persons may only deal in 
the Company’s securities in exceptional circumstances and subject to 
obtaining prior approval.

The Guidelines prohibit directors, senior executives and their closely 
related parties from entering into hedging arrangements with respect 
to securities in the Company (including any shares, options and rights). 
Hedging arrangements include entering into transactions in financial 
products that operate to limit the economic risk associated with 
holding Company securities.

The Board regularly reviews the Guidelines, and adopted a revised 
policy effective from 1 August 2012. 

5.4  Shareholder communication 
The Company aims to ensure that shareholders are kept informed of 
all major developments affecting the state of affairs of the Company. 
The Company aims to promote communication with shareholders and 
to encourage effective participation at general meetings. Additionally, 
the Company recognises that potential investors and other interested 
stakeholders may wish to obtain information about the Company.

The Company’s Shareholder Communication Strategy sets out how 
the Company communicates information to shareholders and other 
stakeholders through a range of forums and publications.

One of the Company’s key communication tools is the Myer  
website (www.myer.com.au). The Company has a dedicated  
Investor Centre section of its website (www.myer.com.au/investor).  
The Investor Centre includes information about the Company  
relevant to shareholders, including:
 ›
 ›

the Company’s ASX announcements; 
key corporate governance documents (including Board and Board 
Committee Charters, and key policies); 
financial reports and investor presentations; and 
information about the Company’s AGM (including the Notice of 
Meeting, and a webcast of the meeting). 

 ›
 ›

The Company provides a telephone helpline facility and an online email 
enquiry service to assist shareholders with any queries. Information is 
also communicated to shareholders via periodic mail-outs, or by email 
to shareholders who have provided their email address. 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

4
3

Part 6 – Diversity at Myer 

Relevant documents  
– available from myer.com.au/investor
 › Diversity Policy 

Myer’s Diversity Policy outlines our approach to creating and 
maintaining an inclusive and collaborative workplace culture. The 
Diversity Policy sets out Myer’s diversity principles. In this context, 
diversity covers gender, age, ethnicity, cultural background, language 
and disability.

 ›

Key principles
Myer’s approach to diversity is underpinned by key principles including:
 › maintaining a safe and inclusive working environment that is 
respectful of individual differences and attributes (including  
family responsibilities);
eliminating artificial barriers to career progression by providing 
support and mentoring, and by developing flexible work practices 
to meet the differing needs of employees in the context of 
business requirements;
recruiting and retaining a skilled and diverse workforce;
employing a fair and effective process for appointment to roles 
based on relative ability, performance and potential; and
fostering a culture, including through education and training, 
that rewards people for furthering diversity.

 ›
 ›

 ›

Diversity objectives 
Myer’s diversity objectives are to ensure that Myer:
 › has an inclusive workplace where every individual can shine 

regardless of gender, cultural identity, age, disability, work style 
or approach;
leverages the value of diversity for all our stakeholders to deliver 
the best customer experience, improved financial performance  
and a stronger corporate reputation; and
continues to take a leadership position on diversity practices.

 ›

 ›

To achieve these objectives Myer:
 › has determined measurable objectives for achieving gender 
diversity. The Board has endorsed these objectives and both 
the objectives and progress in achieving them will be assessed 
annually;

 › will assess pay equity on an annual basis; 
 › will encourage and support the application of workplace flexibility 

policy into practice across the business; and

 › will meet our commitment to the Australian Employment 

Covenant to assist Indigenous Australians to access employment.

Female representation
As at 28 July 2012, the proportion of women employed by Myer was  
as follows:

Board of Directors 

Leadership roles

Total Myer workforce

33.3%

60.2%

78.7%

Corporate Governance Statement continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The following charts outline female leadership representation, as defined by the Equal Opportunity for Woman in the Workplace Agency (EOWA), 
across Myer, which is also included in the Company’s annual report to EOWA.

Women in leadership positions at Myer as at 28 July 2012

27% 

3 females

Women in Strategic leadership

41%

34 females

Women in Business/Functional leadership

62%

80%

553 females

Women in Operational leadership

9,433 females

Women in Self-leadership

Women in leadership positions at Myer as at 30 July 2011

31% 

4 females

Women in Strategic leadership

39%

33 females

Women in Business/Functional leadership

63%

79%

539 females

Women in Operational leadership

9,745 females

Women in Self-leadership

Myer’s approach to diversity
Our approach to diversity includes the following elements – 
meritocracy, fairness and equality, contribution to commercial success, 
and that it is in everyone’s interest that we meet our objectives.

 ›

Over the past year Myer has taken the following steps in relation to 
meeting our diversity objectives including:
 ›

responsibility for diversity has been included in the Board Charter 
(Board diversity), the Nomination Committee Charter (Board 
diversity) and the Human Resources and Remuneration Committee 
Charter (diversity at all levels of the Company below Board level); and

the Board has formally adopted a policy in relation to diversity at all 
levels from the Board down. The policy is available in the Corporate 
Governance section of the Myer website. This action reinforces 
the principles and practices Myer has had in place for a number 
of years. The formalisation of these now provides the framework 
for measurable objectives to be established and reviewed by 
the Board.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

3
5

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Board has also now established measurable objectives for achieving gender diversity at all levels of the Company, as outlined below.

FY2012 and FY2013 Measurable Objectives

Objective

Progress

Myer aims to maintain the proportion  
of female candidates identified in 
succession plans with the proportion of 
females relative to the overall employee 
population at each job grade level. We  
aim to ensure that within each job grade 
level there are a proportionate number  
of senior women who are ready to move 
into leadership roles.

Myer aims to maintain a return rate  
of more than 70 percent for team members 
returning from parental leave.

Myer aims for senior managers to meet or 
formally contact women on parental leave 
at least quarterly.

The career development plans of all female middle management employees are assessed 
annually to ensure their appropriateness in developing and retaining Myer’s female talent.

Currently females represent 27.1 percent of the Strategic Leadership, 41 percent of the 
Business/Function Leadership and 62 percent of the Operation Leadership population. Females 
represent 40 percent of the ‘Top Talent Group’ following the succession planning process. At 
store level females represent 36.5 percent of those identified as having potential for further 
leadership positions.

Myer is committed to ensuring that any team member returning to work after a period of  
parental leave can do so under a graduated return program. Regardless of any other business 
need, returning team members have a minimum six-month period of graduated return to enable 
their reintroduction to the work place.

During the reporting period, 158 women commenced parental leave of which 72.7 percent 
participated in the paid parental leave scheme. During the reporting period 84 percent of team 
members returned to work from previous parental leave periods.

Myer has had a formal ‘keeping in touch’ program in place since 2010 which continues to 
apply. It aids both employees and managers with the transition to and back from parental 
leave, and specifically provides flexibility for women to determine the level of contact they 
wish to be maintained while on parental leave. This has meant women set contact levels they 
were comfortable with, which may have been greater or less than quarterly dependent upon 
their wishes.

Myer aims to maintain gender balance  
in its Managers in Training Programs  
to facilitate the creation of a pool of  
qualified female candidates for Manager 
role opportunities.

The Management Development Program (MDP) and Graduate Development Program (GDP) 
continue to be our two main internal development programs for entry-level management 
positions. The programs are aimed at recognising and rewarding internal team members by 
supporting their career goals, as well as assisting, retaining and promoting entry level female  
team members through comprehensive training and skills development.

During the reporting period 59 percent of participants in the MDP were female with 50 percent 
being promoted to store management salaried positions.

At the start of the reporting period there were 10 participants in the GDP with 90 percent being 
women. During the reporting period all female participants were promoted to salaried positions 
within the national support office. 

Our Merchandise In Training Program is our key middle management program, which has 
continued throughout the reporting period and is aimed at developing team members for senior 
roles within our Merchandise areas.

During the reporting period 89 percent of the participants in this program were female. 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

6
3

Corporate Governance Statement continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Flexible Arrangements and Parental Leave
Diversity has always been valued and encouraged at Myer. With a workforce comprising predominantly female team members. Myer was proud 
to be the first major Australian retailer to introduce paid parental leave in 2009 and has maintained this level of support in addition to more 
recent federal government initiatives regarding parental leave. The nature of retail requires Myer to have a flexible and responsive workforce that 
is available to meet the variable shopping habits of our customers. This flexibility has afforded team members the opportunity to balance work 
and family responsibilities, including graduated return to work from parental leave whilst establishing a long and fulfilling career at Myer. 

We recognise that periods of parental leave represent an interruption in career progression. To this end Myer has introduced a number of 
initiatives to encourage our team members to return to work and to enable them to balance their family and work responsibilities.

Myer offers flexible work arrangements for all team members returning from parental leave. This includes targeted support in special 
circumstances to help balance life priorities with work and to manage careers including: compressed work weeks (where employees work the 
usual number of hours in fewer days), flexible start and finish times, job sharing, telecommuting, part time work arrangements, and unpaid leave 
for any purpose. 

Indigenous participation
During FY2012, Myer signed the Australian Employment Covenant (AEC) – a private sector program aimed at improving Indigenous participation 
through employment opportunities. Myer has committed to increase its number of Indigenous employees and we are in the process of 
developing a plan in regard to this commitment. A significant number of Myer managers have attended information sessions in relation to the AEC.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

3
7

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Compliance with ASX Principles

The table below is provided to facilitate understanding of the Company’s compliance with the recommendations in the ASX Principles  
and indicates where each recommendation is discussed in this statement.*

Recommendation 

principle 1 – lay solid foundations for management and oversight 

Reference in Corporate  
Governance Statement 

1.1   Disclose the functions reserved to the Board and those delegated to senior executives

1.2   Disclose the process for evaluating the performance of senior executives

See sections 1.1 and 1.2. 

See section 1.3. 

principle 2 – Structure the Board to add value

2.1   A majority of the Board should be independent directors

2.2   The chair should be an independent director

2.3   The roles of chair and CEO should not be exercised by the same individual

2.4   The Board should establish a nomination committee 

2.5   Disclose the process for evaluating the performance of the Board,  

its committees and individual directors

principle 3 – promote ethical and responsible decision-making

3.1    Establish a code of conduct which sets out the Company’s key rules, values and guidelines to 

guide the directors, the CEO, the CFO and any other senior executives

3.2    Establish and disclose a diversity policy which requires the Board to establish measurable 

objectives for achieving gender diversity for the Board

3.3   Disclose the Company’s measurable objectives for achieving gender diversity set by the Board 

and progress towards achieving them 

3.4    Disclose the proportion of women employees in the whole organisation, in senior executive 

positions and on the Board

principle 4 – Safeguard integrity in financial reporting

4.1   Establish an audit committee

4.2   The audit committee should have at least three members, consist only of non-executive 

directors (a majority of whom should be independent) and be chaired by an independent chair 
who is not the chair of the Board

4.3   The audit committee should have a formal charter

Principle 5 – Make timely and balanced disclosure

5.1   Establish and disclose a policy to ensure compliance with ASX Listing Rule disclosure 
requirements and accountability at a senior executive level for that compliance

Principle 6 – Respect the rights of shareholders

6.1    Establish and disclose a shareholder communications policy 

Principle 7 – Recognise and manage risk

See sections 2.1 and 2.4. 

See sections 1.2 and 2.1. 

See sections 1.2 and 2.1. 

See sections 1.5, 3.1 and 3.4. 

See section 1.3. 

See section 5.1.

See section 6.

See section 6.

See section 6.

See sections 1.5, 3.1 and 3.2. 

See sections 1.5, 3.1 and 3.2.

See section 3.1.

See section 5.2. 

See section 5.4. 

7.1  Establish and disclose policies for the oversight and management of material business risks

See sections 4.1 and 4.2. 

7.2   The Board should require management to design and implement risk management and internal 
control systems to manage material business risks and to report on whether those risks are 
being managed effectively

7.3   Disclose whether the Board has received assurance from the CEO and the CFO that the 

declaration provided in accordance with s295A of the Corporations Act is founded on a sound 
system of risk management and internal control that is operating effectively in all material 
respects in relation to financial reporting risks

Principle 8 – Remunerate fairly and responsibly

8.1  Establish a remuneration committee

8.2   The remuneration committee should have at least three members, a majority of whom are 

independent, and be chaired by an independent chair

8.3   Distinguish the structure of non-executive directors’ remuneration from that of executive 

directors and senior executives

See sections 4.2, 4.4 and 4.5. 

See section 4.5. 

See sections 3.1 and 3.3.

See sections 3.1 and 3.3. 

See section 1.4 and the 
Remuneration Report.

* The table includes all recommendations in the ASX Principles and Recommendations other than the ‘Guide to Reporting’ recommendations.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

8
3

Corporate Governance Statement continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
DireCtorS’ report

Your directors present their report on the consolidated entity consisting of the Company and the entities it controlled (collectively referred  
to as the Group) at the end of, or during, the period ended 28 July 2012.

1.  Directors

The following persons were directors of the Company during the financial year and/or up to the date of this Directors’ Report:

Director

Position 

Howard McDonald

Paul McClintock AO

Rupert Myer AM

Bernie Brookes 

Anne Brennan 

Tom Flood

Chris Froggatt

Peter Hay

Ian Morrice

Chairman until 10 October 2012 
Independent Non-Executive Director

Chairman from 10 October 2012 
Independent Non-Executive Director

Deputy Chairman from 8 August 2012 
Independent Non-Executive Director

CEO and Managing Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

Date appointed as Director

6 November 20061

8 August 2012

12 July 2006

12 July 2006

16 September 2009

17 March 20092

9 December 2010

3 February 2010

8 August 2012

1  Howard McDonald was appointed a director on 6 November 2006, and Chairman on 4 August 2009.
2  Tom Flood was appointed a director of Myer Pty Ltd in 2007.

Tom Flood retired as a director with effect from 11 April 2012. Paul McClintock AO and Ian Morrice were appointed as directors on  
8 August 2012. All other directors served as directors of the Company for the whole financial year and until the date of this Directors’ Report. 

Howard McDonald will retire from the Board at the conclusion of the Board meeting on 10 October 2012 (the date of this Directors’ Report),  
and will be succeeded as Chairman by Paul McClintock AO at that time. 

Details of the qualifications, experience and special responsibilities of each current director are set out on pages 22 to 23 of this Annual Report. 

2.  Directorships of other listed companies

The following table shows, for each person who served as a director during the financial year and/or up to the date of this Directors’ Report,  
all directorships of companies that were listed on the ASX, other than the Company, since 31 July 2009, and the period for which each 
directorship has been held. 

Director

Howard McDonald

Paul McClintock AO

Rupert Myer AM

Bernie Brookes 

Anne Brennan 

Tom Flood

Chris Froggatt

Peter Hay

Ian Morrice

Listed entity

Nil

Intoll Management Limited (formerly Macquarie Infrastructure  
Investment Management Limited)

Perpetual Limited

AMCIL Limited

Period directorship held

– 

May 2003 – December 2010

April 2004 – present 

January 2000 – present 

Diversified United Investment Limited

November 2002 – January 2012 

Nil 

Charter Hall Group 

Nufarm Limited

Argo Investments Limited 

Echo Entertainment Group Limited 

Nil 

Goodman Fielder Limited

Alumina Limited

– 

October 2010 – present 

February 2011 – present 

September 2011 – present 

March 2012 – present 

– 

August 2009 – present 

December 2002 – present 

Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited 

November 2008 – present 

GUD Holdings Limited 

Metcash Limited 

May 2009 – present 

June 2012 – present 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

3
9

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3.  Meetings of directors and Board committees

The number of meetings of the Board and of each Board committee held during the period ended 28 July 2012, and the numbers of meetings 
attended by each director is set out below. 

All directors are invited to attend Board committee meetings. Most Board committee meetings are attended by all directors. 

Director 

Howard McDonald

Rupert Myer AM

Bernie Brookes

Anne Brennan

Tom Flood** 

Chris Froggatt

Peter Hay 

Meetings of  
Directors

Audit, Finance  
& Risk Committee

Nomination  
& Remuneration  
Committee*

Human Resources  
& Remuneration  
Committee*

Nomination  
Committee*

A

13

13

13

13

10

13

12

B

13

13

13

13

10

13

13

A

–

4

–

4

4

–

–

B

–

4

–

4

4

–

–

A

6

6

–

6

–

6

–

B

6

6

–

6

–

6

–

A

1

1

–

1

–

1

–

B

1

1

–

1

–

1

–

A

1

1

–

1

–

1

–

B

1

1

–

1

–

1
–

Notes:
A = Number of meetings attended.
B = Number of meetings held during the time the director held office or was a member of the committee during the year.
*  On 16 May 2012, the Board approved the establishment of two Board committees – the Human Resources and Remuneration Committee and the Nomination Committee – 

to replace the existing Nomination and Remuneration Committee. 

**  Tom Flood retired as a director on 11 April 2012.

4.  Directors’ relevant interests in shares

The following table sets out the relevant interests that each director has in the Company’s ordinary shares as at the date of this Directors’ Report. 
No director has a relevant interest in a related body corporate of the Company. 

Director

Howard McDonald

Paul McClintock AO

Rupert Myer AM

Bernie Brookes 

Anne Brennan 

Chris Froggatt

Peter Hay

Ian Morrice

Ordinary shares

Options 

2,074,390

106,000

733,999

10,004,399

53,658

10,040

12,195

82,000

Nil

Nil 

Nil

Performance  
rights

Nil 

Nil

Nil

7,380,394

2,058,383

Nil 

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil 

Nil

Nil

Nil

Tom Flood retired as a director of the Company with effect from 11 April 2012. At the date of his retirement, Mr Flood had a relevant interest  
in 400,000 ordinary shares in the Company. 

5.  Company Secretary 

Marion Rodwell is the Company Secretary of the Company. She was appointed Group General Counsel and Company Secretary in 2008.  
Ms Rodwell’s experience and qualifications are set out on page 25 of this Annual Report. 

6.  Principal activities

During the financial year, the principal activity of the Group was the operation of the Myer department store business. 

7.  Review of operations 

A detailed review of the Group’s operations for the financial year and the results of those operations is set out on pages 2 to 21  
of this Annual Report.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

0
4

Directors’ Report continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
8.  Business strategies and future developments

11.  Dividends 

A summary of the Group’s strategic plan is set out on page 2 of  
this Annual Report. 

The following dividends have been paid to shareholders during the 
financial year:

Discussion of the Group’s business strategies and comments on  
the likely developments in the Group’s operations are included  
on pages 4 to 16.

More detailed information relating to the Group’s business strategies, 
likely developments in the Group’s operations, the expected future 
results of those operations, and the Group’s prospects for future 
financial years has not been included in this Directors’ Report.  
The directors believe that the inclusion of such information would  
be likely to result in unreasonable prejudice to the Group. 

2011 Final Dividend

Final dividend for the period ended 30 July 2011 of 
11.5 cents per fully paid ordinary share, fully franked, 
paid on 16 November 2011

2012 Interim Dividend

Interim dividend for the period ended 28 July 2012 
of 10 cents per fully paid ordinary share, fully franked, 
paid on 10 May 2012

$m

67,068

58,336

9.  Significant changes in the state of affairs 

The following significant changes to the Group’s state of affairs have 
occurred since the commencement of the financial year: 
 ›
 ›

a continuing challenging retail environment; 
the appointment of Mr Paul McClintock AO as a new non-executive 
director who will be appointed as Chairman of the Company from 
10 October 2012, and the appointment of Mr Ian Morrice as a new 
non-executive director; 
the opening of our new stores in Mackay (Queensland) in October 
2011 and Fountain Gate (Victoria) in September 2012 and the 
closure of our stores in Forest Hill (Victoria) and Tuggeranong 
(Australian Capital Territory) as the leases to those stores expired; 
the first full year of sass & bide; 
the first full year of operation of the Myer global sourcing offices  
in Shanghai and Hong Kong; and 
the continued strengthening of our merchandise offer with 
the acquisition of a number of brands, including Trent Nathan,  
Bauhaus and Grab.

 ›

 ›
 ›

 ›

These matters are discussed on pages 4 to 16 of this Annual Report. 

Other than the above, there were no significant changes in the state  
of affairs of the Group during the financial year or up to the date of  
this Directors’ Report. 

10.  Matters subsequent to the end of the financial year

No matter or circumstance has arisen since the end of the financial 
year which has not been dealt with in this Directors’ Report 
or the Financial Report, that has significantly affected, or may 
significantly affect:
(a)  the Group’s operations in future financial years; 
(b) the results of those operations in future financial years; and 
(c)  the Group’s state of affairs in future financial years. 

In addition to the above dividends, since the end of the financial year, 
the Board of Directors has determined a final fully franked dividend  
of 9 cents per fully paid share, to be paid on 14 November 2012.

Further information regarding dividends is set out in the Financial 
Report (at note 23).

12.   Options and performance rights granted  

over unissued shares

The Myer Equity Incentive Plan (MEIP) operates for selected senior 
executives and has been in operation since December 2006. Under 
the MEIP, the Company has granted eligible executives ‘options’ and 
‘performance rights’ over unissued ordinary shares of the Company, 
subject to certain vesting conditions. Each option or performance 
right entitles the holder to acquire one ordinary fully paid share in the 
Company (subject to the adjustments outlined below).

Options 
No options were granted under the MEIP in the financial year ended  
28 July 2012 and no options have been granted since the end of the year.

The following table sets out the details of options that have been 
granted under the MEIP over unissued shares of the Company and 
that remain on issue as at the date of this Directors’ Report:

Date options  
granted

Expiry date

23 January 2008

21 December 2012

17 December 2008

24 October 2013

30 June 2009

24 October 2014

6 November 2009

31 December 2012

6 November 2009 

31 December 2013

6 November 2009

31 December 2013

Closing balance

Exercise 
price of 
options

Number of 
options 

$3.00

$2.14

$2.34

$4.10

$5.74

$4.10

5,913,180

2,712,063

2,828,900

2,100,841

2,227,723

5,152,671

20,935,378

The number of shares that option holders are entitled to receive on 
the exercise of an option, or the exercise price of those options, may 
be adjusted in a manner consistent with the ASX Listing Rules if:
 ›

there is a pro-rata issue of shares to the Company’s shareholders 
(such as a bonus issue); or 
any reconstruction of the capital of the Company (such as a 
subdivision or return of capital). 

 ›

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

4
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
If the manner of adjustment is not prescribed by the ASX Listing 
Rules, the Board can determine the adjustment to ensure that 
option holders are not advantaged or disadvantaged as a result  
of any such capital action. 

Further information about options granted under the MEIP is  
included in the Remuneration Report.

On exercise of securities granted under the MEIP, shares may be 
transferred from the Trust to the relevant participants or the Company 
may issue fully paid ordinary shares directly to MEIP participants.

During the period, 481,205 shares were transferred from the 
Trust to participants on the exercise of options under the MEIP, as 
detailed below.

Performance rights 
During the financial year, the Company granted 5,651,786 performance 
rights. No performance rights have been granted since the end of the 
financial year ended 28 July 2012.

Following a review of the Company’s remuneration structure in 2011, the 
Board revised the Company’s long term incentive plan for selected senior 
executives. During the financial year, 3,593,403 performance rights were 
granted under the MEIP (instead of options) to selected senior executives. 

In addition, Mr Brookes was granted 2,058,383 performance rights as  
a long term incentive component of Mr Brookes’ remuneration 
package when the Company renewed Mr Brookes’ contract as Myer’s 
CEO and Managing Director. The performance rights were granted  
to Mr Brookes following approval by shareholders at the Company’s  
2011 AGM. 

The following table sets out the details of performance rights that 
have been granted under the MEIP and that remain on issue as at  
the date of this Directors’ Report:

Date options  
granted

1 December 2006

1 August 2007

17 December 2008

Exercise price  
of options

Number of shares 
provided on  
exercise of options

$0.01

$1.27

$2.14

316,809

120,396

44,000

481,205

In addition, the following fully paid ordinary shares of the Company 
were issued during the period ended 28 July 2012 on the exercise  
of options held by two directors of the Company, Tom Flood and 
Howard McDonald. 

Date options  
granted

1 August 2007

Exercise price  
of options

$1.27

Number of shares 
provided on  
exercise of options

36,667

36,667

Date  
performance  
rights granted

21 October 2011  
(grant to senior 
executives)

9 December 2012  
(grant to CEO)

Closing balance

Expiry date

Issue 
price

Number of 
performance 
rights 

Post balance date events 
Since 28 July 2012:
 › no further shares of the Company have been issued to, or 

otherwise acquired by the Trust;

31 October 2014

31 October 2014

Nil

Nil 

3,043,782

2,058,383

5,102,165

 › no further shares of the Company held by the Trust have been 

transferred to participants on the exercise of options granted under 
the MEIP; and

 › no further shares of the Company have been issued to MEIP 

participants on the exercise of options granted under the MEIP.

A holder of a performance right may only participate in new issues of 
securities of the Company if the performance right has been exercised, 
if participation is permitted by its terms and the shares in respect of 
the performance right have been allocated and transferred to the 
performance right holder before the record date for determining 
entitlements to the new issue. 

Further information about performance rights granted under the  
MEIP (including the performance conditions attached to those 
performance rights) is included in the Remuneration Report.

13.  Shares issued on the exercise of options and 

performance rights

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

2
4

Options 
From time to time, the Company issues fully paid ordinary shares in the 
Company to the Myer Equity Plans Trust (the Trust) for the purposes of 
meeting anticipated exercises of securities granted under the MEIP.

During the period ended 28 July 2012, 200,000 fully paid ordinary 
shares of the Company were issued to the Trust for this purpose. 

To calculate the issue price of shares issued to the Trust, the Company 
uses the 7-Day Volume Weighted Average Share Price of the 
Company’s shares as at the close of trading on the date of issue.  
The Trust held 25,200 fully paid ordinary shares of the Company  
as at 29 July 2012.

Performance rights 
No performance rights were eligible to vest or be exercised during  
the financial year or up to the date of this Directors’ Report. 

14.  Remuneration Report 

The Remuneration Report, which comprises part of this Directors’ 
Report, is presented separately on pages 44 to 59.

15.  Indemnification and insurance of directors and officers 

The Company’s Constitution requires the Company to indemnify 
current and former directors, alternate directors, executive officers 
and officers of the Company on a full indemnity basis and to the full 
extent permitted by law against all liabilities incurred as an officer of 
the Group, except to the extent covered by insurance. Further, the 
Company’s Constitution permits the Company to maintain and pay 
insurance premiums for director and officer liability insurance,  
to the extent permitted by law. 

Consistent with (and in addition to) the provisions in the Company’s 
Constitution outlined above, the Company has also entered into deeds 
of access, indemnity and insurance with all directors of the Company 
which provide indemnities against losses incurred in their role as 
directors, subject to certain exclusions, including to the extent that 

Directors’ Report continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
such indemnity is prohibited by the Corporations Act or any other 
applicable law. The deeds stipulate that the Company will meet the full 
amount of any such liabilities, costs and expenses (including legal fees). 

During the financial year the Company paid insurance premiums for 
a directors’ and officers’ liability insurance contract that provides cover 
for the current and former directors, alternate directors, secretaries and 
executive officers of the Company and its subsidiaries. The directors 
have not included details of the nature of the liabilities covered in 
this contract or the amount of the premium paid, as disclosure is 
prohibited under the terms of the contract.

16.  Proceedings on behalf of the Company 

No person has applied to the court under section 237 of the 
Corporations Act for leave to bring proceedings on behalf of the 
Company, or to intervene in any proceedings to which the Company 
is a party, for the purpose of taking responsibility on behalf of the 
Company for all or part of those proceedings. 

No proceedings have been brought or intervened in on behalf of 
the Company with the leave of the court under section 237 of the 
Corporations Act. 

17.  Environmental regulation 

The Group is subject to and has complied with the reporting and 
compliance requirements of both the Energy Efficiency Opportunities 
Act 2006 (Cth) and the National Greenhouse and Energy Reporting Act 
2007 (Cth) (NGER Act). No environmental breaches have been notified 
to the Group by any government agency.

The Energy Efficiency Opportunities Act 2006 requires the Group to 
assess its energy usage, including the identification, investigation 
and evaluation of energy saving opportunities, and to report publicly 
on the assessments undertaken, including action the Group intends 
to take as a result of such assessments. As required under this Act, 
the Group registered with the Department of Resources, Energy and 
Tourism as a participant entity and is due to submit its fifth public 
report for financial year 2012 by 31 December 2012. Additionally,  
Myer is required to submit its second cycle Assessment Plan on  
31 December 2012. The Group has published its EEO public reports on 
the Investor Centre section of its website, www.myer.com.au/investor 
(under Reporting – Sustainability).

The NGER Act requires the Group to report its annual greenhouse gas 
emissions and energy use. The Group has implemented systems and 
processes for the collection and calculation of the data required, and 
is due to submit its fourth report to the Greenhouse and Energy Data 
Officer by 31 October 2012, in compliance with the requirements of 
the NGER Act.

18.  Non-audit services

The Company may decide to employ its external auditor on 
assignments additional to its statutory audit duties where the  
auditor’s expertise and experience with the Company and/or  
the Group are important.

Details of the amounts paid or payable to the auditor (PwC) for audit 
and non-audit services provided during the year are set out in the 
Financial Report (at note 25).

The Board has considered the position and, in accordance with advice 
received from the Audit, Finance and Risk Committee, is satisfied that 
the provision of the non-audit services is compatible with the general 
standard of independence for auditors imposed by the Corporations 
Act. The directors are satisfied that the provision of non-audit services 
by the auditor did not compromise the auditor independence 
requirements of the Corporations Act for the following reasons:
 ›

all non-audit services have been reviewed by the Audit, Finance 
and Risk Committee to ensure they do not impact on the 
impartiality and objectivity of the auditor; and

 › none of the services undermine the general principles relating  

to auditor independence as set out in APES 110 Code of Ethics for 
Professional Accountants.

19.  Auditor’s independence declaration

A copy of the auditor’s independence declaration as required under 
section 307C of the Corporations Act is set out on page 114 of this 
Annual Report.

20.  Rounding of amounts 

The Group has taken advantage of ASIC Class Order 98/100 relating 
to the ‘rounding off’ of amounts in the Directors’ Report. Amounts in 
the Directors’ Report have been rounded off to the nearest thousand 
dollars, or in certain cases, to the nearest dollar.

This Directors’ Report is made in accordance with a resolution  
of directors. 

Howard McDonald  
Chairman  
Melbourne, 10 October 2012

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

4
3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
remuneration report

The remuneration structure strives to achieve a balance between 
retaining, motivating and rewarding individual performance and 
ensuring a robust linkage to overall Company performance and 
shareholder returns.

This year’s outcomes
In terms of the year just completed, the performance of individual 
executives was good in difficult market conditions. 

Base salaries were reviewed and generally any increases applied were 
modest, particularly in light of the market comparator roles.

The executives performed well against the targets set and most of 
their KPIs were met; however, given the overall profit achieved, no STI 
payments were made.

The reward potential of the short-term incentive plan was significantly 
impacted by the prevailing economic conditions and their impact 
on the retail sector. Executives were set challenging KPIs including 
achieving budgeted Net Profit After Tax (NPAT) to drive performance 
for shareholders. 

In terms of long-term performance, the previous plans that may have 
resulted in options vesting were tested this year. These options are 
unlikely to vest as the EPS target is unlikely to be achieved. 

Given the combination of outcomes, for the current year, on all three 
aspects of executive reward the Board has determined some structural 
changes to reward for this year. Details are provided in this report.

Human Resources and Remuneration Committee  
and Nomination Committee

The Board reviews annually its role, responsibilities and performance 
to ensure that the Company continues to maintain and improve 
its governance standards. During 2012, the Board, on the 
recommendation of the Nomination and Remuneration Committee, 
resolved to separate the Nomination and Remuneration Committee 
into two Committees comprising the Nomination Committee and the 
Human Resources and Remuneration Committee. As a consequence, 
revised Charters of responsibility were developed for each Committee. 
Each Committee charter is available on the Company’s website  
www.myer.com.au.

The Chair of the Board, Mr Howard McDonald, chairs the Nomination 
Committee. The role of the Nomination Committee is to support and 
advise the Board on the composition of the Board and matters relating 
to Board governance and performance. The other members of  
the Committee are Mr Rupert Myer, Ms Anne Brennan and  
Ms Chris Froggatt.

The Human Resources and Remuneration Committee is chaired by 
Ms Chris Froggatt. The other members of the Committee are Messrs. 
Howard McDonald, Rupert Myer and Ms Anne Brennan.

This Remuneration Report sets out the strategy, framework and 
conditions of employment for Myer Holdings Limited Non-Executive 
Directors, Executive Directors and other Key Management Personnel 
(KMP) of the Group and the Company. The report also details the 
role and accountability of the Board and the relevant Committees 
established to support the Board on these matters.

Contents
This report provides details on the following matters:
 › Overview 
 › Human Resources and Remuneration Committee 

and Nomination Committee

Executive remuneration

 › Directors and executives disclosed in this report
 › Use of remuneration consultants
 ›
 › Non-Executive Director Remuneration
 ›
 ›
 ›

Remuneration and company performance
Future focus for Executive reward
The Remuneration of Executive and Non-Executive Directors 
and KMPs

Overview

During 2011–12, the Board continued to review Myer’s approach  
to executive remuneration. This review was initiated with a view to 
ensuring strong and effective ongoing alignment between executive 
remuneration, Company performance and shareholder returns.

The Board is committed to a direct, transparent linkage between 
performance and reward so that executive reward outcomes are 
dependent on delivering results to shareholders. We have a strong  
and talented executive team. The remuneration approach is designed 
to ensure these individuals are retained and motivated to drive the 
future success of our Company.

The approach is regularly reviewed to ensure it meets the needs of  
the business and shareholders. At the same time, we are cognisant 
of the practices of other Australian companies and competitors. This 
review process is essential to keep our remuneration offering relevant 
and competitive.

As a result of the most recent review, we are considering changes to 
reward mechanisms to ensure appropriate rewards for performance  
in what remains an uncertain and volatile market. For some executives 
we will be reducing the portion of their total annual remuneration 
based on the short-term incentive and increasing the fixed 
remuneration to better balance overall reward structure in line with 
market practices.

External benchmarking has identified that a number of the Key 
Management Personnel’s base salary had fallen below the market 
levels the Board targets for reward for this group. It is important to our 
long-term business sustainability that we retain key talent by ensuring 
all Myer executives are being remunerated at market rates in a highly 
competitive market. The Board commissioned external benchmarking 
undertaken by Mercer (Australia) Pty Ltd (Mercer) for CEO and KMP 
roles, which included data from relevant Australian listed companies. 
The review found the KMP base salary was below the market median. 
The CEO’s total remuneration is positioned at the level targeted by the 
Board in his renewed contract established in 2011. 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

4
4

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The Human Resources and Remuneration Committee (Committee)  
has the responsibility to make recommendations to the Board on:
 › Non-Executive Director fees;
 ›

executive remuneration (directors and other executives) including 
specific recommendations on remuneration packages and other 
terms of employment for the Chairman, Non-Executive Directors, 
the CEO and other senior executives; and
the over-arching remuneration framework including the policy, 
strategy and practices for fixed reward and both short and long 
term incentive plans. 

 ›

The Committee has been established under rule 8.15 of the 
Constitution of the Company.

The objective is to ensure that remuneration policies and structures 
are fair and competitive and aligned with the long-term strategic 
interests of the Group and the creation of shareholder value. In 
doing this, the Committee seeks advice from independent advisors 
particularly on matters such as market trends and comparative terms 
and conditions relevant for consideration to Myer.

Further information on the role of the Committee, its membership 
and meetings held throughout the year are set out in the Corporate 
Governance Statement and the Directors’ Report.

The Committee has regard to the following policy objectives:
to ensure that the Company’s remuneration structures are 
 ›
equitable and aligned with the long-term interests of the Company 
and its shareholders;
to attract and retain skilled executives;
to structure short and long-term incentives that are challenging 
and linked to the creation of sustainable shareholder returns; and
to ensure that any termination benefits are justified and appropriate.

 ›
 ›

 ›

The Committee must at all times have regard to, and notify the Board 
as appropriate, of all legal and regulatory requirements, including any 
shareholder approvals required in connection with remuneration matters.

The Committee Chair or if they are not available, a Committee 
member, will attend the Annual General Meeting and make 
themselves available to answer any questions from shareholders 
about the Committee’s activities or, if appropriate, the Company’s 
remuneration arrangements.

Directors and executives disclosed in this report

Name 

Position

non-executive Directors
H McDonald 

Chairman, Independent Non-Executive Director1

A Brennan 

T Flood 

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director  
(retired 11 April 2012)2

C Froggatt 

Independent Non-Executive Director 

P Hay 

R Myer 

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director3

executive Director
B Brookes 

CEO and Managing Director

Name 

Position

other Key Management personnel
M Ashby 

Chief Financial Officer

M Goddard 

G Travers 

N Abboud 

P Winn 

Executive General Manager Retail Development 
(appointed 13 March 2012)

Executive General Manager Business Services 
and Office of the CEO

Executive General Manager Stores4

Executive General Manager Merchandise5

Changes since the end of the reporting period
Paul McClintock AO was appointed as an Independent Non-Executive 
Director on 8 August 2012 and will be appointed Chairman on 
10 October 2012. Ian Morrice was appointed as an Independent 
Non-Executive Director on 8 August 2012.

1 

 H McDonald will retire on 10 October 2012. H McDonald was appointed a director 
on 6 November 2006 and Chairman on 4 August 2009.

2  T Flood was appointed a director on 26 July 2007.
3  R Myer was appointed Deputy Chairman on 8 August 2012.
4  N Abboud ceased employment on 18 September 2012.
5  P Winn ceased employment on 8 December 2011.

Use of remuneration consultants

The Board directly engages external advisors to provide input to 
the process of reviewing Non-Executive Director, Executive Director 
and executive remuneration. During 2012, Mercer was engaged by 
the Committee to provide relevant market comparator information 
and a recommendation in regard to the level of Non-Executive 
Director fees including board and committee fees. To ensure that 
Mercer, in making the remuneration recommendation, would be 
free from undue influence of the Non-Executive Directors to whom 
the recommendation relates, remuneration recommendations were 
provided by Mercer directly to the Chair of the Human Resources 
and Remuneration Committee and were not provided to a person 
who is neither a director nor a member of the Human Resources and 
Remuneration Committee. Mercer also provided a statement to the 
Committee that the advice had been prepared free of undue influence 
from the Non-Executive Directors to whom the advice relates. 

The Board is satisfied that remuneration recommendations were made 
free from undue influence. All decisions were made independently 
using the information provided and having careful regard to Myer’s 
position, strategic objectives and current requirements. The reasons  
for the Board being satisfied include the fact that:
 › procedures were implemented to ensure that remuneration 

recommendations were provided by Mercer directly to the Chair;

 › Mercer did not provide remuneration recommendations to a 
person who is neither a director nor a member of the Human 
Resources and Remuneration Committee in accordance with the 
Corporations Act 2001; and

 › Mercer provided a statement that remuneration recommendations 
were free of undue influence from the Non-Executive Directors to 
whom the remuneration recommendation relates.

Myer provides superannuation arrangements for employees who 
exercise choice in participating in a Myer sponsored superannuation 
option through Myer’s participation in the Mercer Public Master Trust. 
Myer also engaged Mercer’s Retirement Risk and Finance business unit 
to provide advice in relation to the Myer Super Plan. This advice was 
commissioned by and provided to Myer executives. The fee payable 
for this advice was $8,000.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

4
5

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Mercer also provided access to the Mercer database for ad hoc 
enquiries from Myer generally, other than for advice on KMP. The  
fee payable in relation to those ad hoc enquiries was $4,497. 

Base annual fees

Chair 

The total fee paid to Mercer during the year inclusive of remuneration 
advice, superannuation and database services, was $48,522. 

Executive remuneration 

The remuneration structure seeks to ensure that executive  
rewards deliver an appropriate balance between shareholder  
and executive interests.

The remuneration structure provides a mix of fixed and variable  
(or ‘at risk’) pay, and a blend of short and longer term incentives.  
As executives gain seniority within the Group, the balance of this  
mix shifts to a higher proportion of ‘at risk’ pay.

In order to align shareholder and executive interests and attract  
and retain talent, the remuneration structure is designed to:
encourage a performance-based workplace culture and 
 ›
recognition for contribution to meeting business objectives;

 › have profit as a core component of reward design;
 ›

through long term incentive, focus on sustained growth in 
shareholder returns, consisting of dividends and growth in  
earnings per share and share price;

 › deliver consistent financial returns as well as focusing the 

executives on key non-financial drivers of value;
attract and retain high-calibre executives; and 
reward capability and performance.

 ›
 ›

As a general guide, the Company targets a median fixed remuneration 
position having regard to a comparator group of companies and a 
slightly higher position for incentive reward both short and long term 
against the same group. 

Non-Executive Director remuneration

Fees and payments to Non-Executive Directors reflect the demands 
and responsibilities of those directors. The Board, on recommendation 
of the Committee, reviews Non-Executive Directors’ fees and payments 
at least once a year. As part of that review the Board considers the 
advice of independent remuneration consultants in relation to:

 › Chairman’s fees and payments;
 › Non-Executive Directors’ fees and payments; and 
 › payments made in relation to the Chair of committees or for other 

specific tasks that may be performed by Directors.

Non-Executive Directors’ fees are determined within an aggregate 
directors’ fee pool limit as approved from time to time by Myer 
shareholders in the general meeting. The maximum aggregate sum 
excludes special and additional remuneration for special exertions and 
additional services performed by a director as determined appropriate 
by the Board but includes superannuation as is required by the ASX 
Listing Rules as well as committee fees that follow. The Constitution 
also makes provision for Myer to pay all expenses incurred by directors 
in attending meetings and carrying out their duties. The current 
maximum aggregate fee pool limit is $2,150,000 per annum. The 
aggregate fee pool limit has not changed since the Group was listed in 
November 2009. Non-Executive Directors who chair a committee also 
receive additional yearly fees for their role in serving that committee. 
The following yearly fees currently apply:

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

6
4

Other Non-Executive Directors

Additional annual fees

Deputy Chair

Audit, Finance and Risk Committee – Chair

Audit, Finance and Risk Committee – member

Human Resources and Remuneration  
Committee – Chair

Human Resources and Remuneration  
Committee – member

Nomination Committee – Chair

Nomination Committee – member

$500,000 1

$150,000

$30,000 2

$30,000

–

$15,000

–

–

–

1  The new fee to apply for the Chair will be $400,000 effective from October 2012. 
2  The new fee applicable to the role of Deputy Chairman will apply from August 2012.

During 2012, the Board considered a report from independent advisers 
(Mercer) in relation to Non-Executive Director fees generally, and 
decided not to change the base or additional fees. 

Non-Executive Directors do not receive performance-based pay. 
However, they are able to purchase shares in the Company, which can 
be acquired on market during approved ‘windows’ for share trading 
consistent with the Company’s Guidelines for Dealing in Securities. 

Non-Executive Directors are not entitled to any additional 
remuneration upon retirement. Superannuation contributions 
required by legislation are made from the fee paid to directors  
and fall within the aggregate fee pool limit.

In August 2012, Myer announced a range of changes to Board 
membership including the appointment of Mr Paul McClintock AO  
as Chairman from 10 October 2012. Mr McClintock will be paid a fee  
of $400,000 per annum. Mr Rupert Myer AM was also appointed 
Deputy Chairman effective 8 August 2012. As part of that appointment 
a new additional fee was established for the role of Deputy Chairman  
of $30,000.

Nomination of directors 
The responsibilities of the Nomination Committee in relation to the 
nomination of directors are as follows:
 ›

review and recommend to the Board the size and composition 
of the Board, including review of Board succession plans and the 
succession of the Chairman and CEO;
review and recommend to the Board the criteria for Board 
membership, including assessment of necessary and desirable 
competencies of Board members;
review and recommend to the Board membership of the Board, 
including recommendations for the appointment and re-election 
of directors, and where necessary propose candidates for 
consideration by the Board;
assist the Board as required in relation to the performance 
evaluation of the Board, its committees and individual directors; and
review and make recommendations in relation to any corporate 
governance issues as requested by the Board from time to time.

 ›

 ›

 ›

 ›

Remuneration Report continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
In exercising its responsibilities the Committee assists the Board as 
required to identify individuals who are qualified to become Board 
members (including in respect of any Executive Directors), considering 
the skills, experience, expertise and personal qualities that will best 
complement Board effectiveness and the capability of the candidate 
to devote the necessary time and commitment to the role. This 
involves a consideration of matters such as other Board or executive 
appointments, potential conflicts of interest, and independence.

Short Term Incentive (STI)
Short-term variable reward for the CEO and KMP are determined based 
on the achievement of established key performance indicators (KPIs). 
These KPIs are set by reference to the Company’s overall performance 
and individual performance objectives established for the year. In 
the case of the CEO, these objectives are set by the Chairman and 
endorsed by the Board. KPIs for the KMP are set by the CEO and 
endorsed by the Committee for approval by the Board.

The Committee also reviews the Board Charter on a periodic basis and 
recommends any amendments for Board consideration and ensures that 
an effective induction process is in place for any newly appointed directors.

Remuneration and Company performance

The Company’s remuneration principles and policies have been 
applied during the year to ensure remuneration outcomes for 
executives reflect the prevailing market conditions, the need to attract 
and retain talented executives and Company performance. 

The executive pay and reward framework has three components:
 ›

Total Fixed Compensation (TFC) – base pay and benefits, including 
superannuation;
Short Term Incentives (STI) through participation in the Myer 
Annual Incentive Plan (MAIP); and
Long Term Incentives (LTI) through participation in the Myer Equity 
Incentive Plan (MEIP).

 ›

 ›

The combination of these three components comprises an executive’s 
total remuneration reflected by percentage in the following charts:

20%1

40%

26%

CEO

40%

KMP

44%

30%

Base 
Salary

STI

LTI

1  The target LTI remuneration for the CEO reflects one third of the $2.7 million 
allocation of performance rights approved in 2011 assessed over a three  
year period.

Total Fixed Compensation (TFC)
TFC was structured as a total fixed employment compensation 
package, made up of base salary, superannuation and other benefits. 
Base salary levels for each executive were set with reference to the 
market conditions and the scope and nature of each individual’s role, 
the experience of the individual and performance in that role. 

Base salaries were reviewed during the year and generally any 
increases applied were modest, particularly in light of market 
comparator rates. Superannuation provided to KMP remained 
unchanged, as were other benefits.

Given the prevailing economic conditions and their impact on the 
retail sector generally, the Board has considered the performance 
of the Myer management team in relation to each of these areas of 
focus. While the returns generated from the business were down on 
expectations they were reflective of the general retail environment. 
The Board has, however, determined that given the overall profit 
achieved they did not warrant the payment of the STI for the year.

Myer’s short term incentive plan (Myer Annual Incentive Plan – MAIP) 
operates on an annual basis subject to Board review and approval. 
The FY2012 MAIP applied to all eligible management team members 
including the KMP, subject to certain conditions and performance criteria 
being met which are reviewed and approved annually by the Board. 

The current quantum of an executive’s MAIP reward varies depending 
on the specific role, with a potential reward of 100% of base pay at the 
CEO level for ‘at target’ performance, up to 70% for Executive General 
Managers and 50% for Group General Managers, through to 10% for ‘at 
target’ performance for store or merchandise management level roles. 
If the Group achieves the pre-determined performance targets set by 
the Board, a short term incentive will be paid. 

MAIP rewards are generally payable in October each year after the final 
determination and release of audited full-year results. The MAIP criteria 
applied in FY2012 used an NPAT target as a threshold to ensure that an 
STI reward is only available when profit is consistent with or in excess 
of the business plan approved by the Board.

Each executive level has a target MAIP reward depending on their 
accountabilities and their impact on the Group or business unit 
performance. The target reward is the maximum total STI payment for 
achieving target objectives. A minimum threshold is also set, below 
which no STI reward is provided. The Board retains the discretion to 
provide an award greater than the target maximum reward where 
performance against the performance criteria warrants such a reward.

Each year, the Committee considers the appropriate performance 
criteria and recommends any payout level under the MAIP, if targets 
are met, for Board approval.

The Committee is responsible for assessing whether the performance 
criteria are met. To help make this assessment, the Committee 
receives reports on performance from management. All proposed 
MAIP payments are verified by internal audit review prior to 
any payment being made. The Committee has the discretion to 
recommend to the Board an adjustment to short term incentives in 
light of unexpected or unintended circumstances. This discretion has 
not been applied this year despite the factors impacting the overall 
result being largely macro in nature and affecting many retail and 
other businesses generally.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

4
7

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The following graph shows the average individual total MAIP payment 
(as a % of each individual’s target MAIP, where 100% is the target) for 
the KMP group and its relationship to Group Earnings Before Interest, 
Taxes, Depreciation and Amortisation (EBITDA) and NPAT outcomes 
over three financial years. 

EBITDA

NPAT

MAIP

s
n
o

i
l
l
i

M
$

$400

$300

$200

$100

$0

60%

40%

20%

0%

%
o
f

t
a
r
g
e
t

I

M
A
P
p
a
i
d
t
o
s
e
n
o
r
e
x
e
c
u
t
i
v
e
s

i

FY2010

FY2011

FY2012

Given the balance sought by the Board to meet all the remuneration 
objectives set and the non-payment of any short term incentive since 
2010, the Committee has considered revised metrics for FY2013 and  
has determined that NPAT, Sales and Omni-channel will form the  
basis of FY2013 metrics for short-term incentive for the KMP and 
certain other senior executives (Executive General Managers and 
Group General Managers). Details are provided in the section on 
Future focus for executive reward on page 49.

Long Term Incentive (LTI) 
An allocation of performance rights for each KMP through the 
Myer Equity Incentive Plan (MEIP) is determined as part of the Total 
Remuneration for an executive role. The Committee determines 
LTI awards by assessing the quantum required to provide a market 
competitive Total Remuneration reward structure including base  
salary and STI amounts.

The purpose of the LTI is to focus management’s efforts on the 
achievement of sustainable long-term growth and success of the 
Company and to align senior executive rewards with sustained 
shareholder returns through metrics such as Earnings Per Share 
performance and relative Total Shareholder Return performance hurdles.

Myer’s long term incentive plan operates for selected senior executives 
and has been in operation since December 2006. Under the MEIP, 
eligible senior executives have in the past been granted options, each 
option entitling them to acquire one fully paid ordinary share in the 
Company, subject to the satisfaction of vesting terms and conditions 
determined by the Board.

In 2011, the Board reviewed the long term incentives provided to 
the senior executives as part of its annual review of the remuneration 
structure. As part of that review, the Board approved a change from the 
grant of options to the grant of ‘performance rights’ under the MEIP. 

The performance conditions established for the MEIP are designed 
to create and deliver sustained shareholder returns and to reward 
executives when shareholders benefit. 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

8
4

0.500

0.375

0.250

0.125

0

s

e

v

i

t

u

c

e

x

e

r

o

i

n

e

s

o

t

d

i

a

p

P

I

A

M

t

e

g

r

a

t

f

o

%

FY2011

FY2012

Under the MEIP, performance rights are granted to each participant. 
Each performance right is a conditional right to one ordinary Myer 
share upon satisfaction of the vesting conditions established for  
the plan over the three-year performance period established.  
The performance right will therefore not provide any value to the  
holder between the grant years until the end of the financial year  
in which the plan vests and then only if the performance conditions 
$400
are achieved. The Committee regards it as an important principle 
that performance rights will be forfeited by the individual in specific 
circumstances, including if they resign from the Company within 
$300
the three-year performance period. Performance rights do not carry 
entitlements to ordinary dividends or other shareholder rights. Dividends 
are not received by the executives during the performance period.

s
n
o

$200
Upon vesting, performance rights are automatically exercised (at no 
cost to the participant) in accordance with the terms of the grant and 
Myer’s Guidelines for Dealing in Securities.

M
$

i
l
l
i

$100

LTI awards only vest to the extent that performance conditions 
are met. The awards are governed by the MEIP rules. Any Board 
discretion, such as vesting in the event of a change of control, is clearly 
prescribed under the Plan rules. Options or rights under the MEIP may 
$0
vest prior to the vesting date on a change of control or on a pro-rata 
basis, at the discretion of the Board.

FY2010

The following table shows the Company’s annual performance against 
a range of metrics since 2010. The table shows the impact of Company 
performance on shareholder returns, taking into account dividend 
payments, share price changes, and other capital adjustments during 
the period.

Basic earnings  
per share (cents)1

NPAT (millions)2

Dividends  
(cents per share)

Share price at  
beginning of year3

Share price at  
end of year

31 July
2010

30 July
2011

28 July 
2012

29.0

$168.7

27.9

$162.7

23.9

$139.3

22.0

22.5

19.0

$4.10

$3.45

$2.31

$3.45

$2.31

$1.83

1  2010 Basic earnings per share is calculated using proforma NPAT and divided by 
the closing shares on issue. 2011 and 2012 Basic earnings per share is calculated 
using normalised Net Profit After Tax and divided by the weighted average shares.

2  For details of 2011 and 2012 NPAT refer to page 5.
3  2010 share price at the beginning of the year is the share price at listing.

A further long-term incentive in the form of retention incentive was 
introduced for selected executives other than the CEO at the time of 
the listing of Myer in 2009. These incentives were targeted at retaining 
those executives for an extended period after the listing which 
expired on 1 November 2011 and have now been paid where the 
conditions attached to the payment including continuous service and 
achievement of individual performance objectives were satisfied. The 
retention arrangements were in the form of deferred cash incentives 
and were conditional on continued employment with the Group and 
meeting certain individual performance conditions as established by 
the Company. The retention arrangements involved payments over a 
staggered period with the final component of the retention incentive 
paid on 1 November 2011. 

Remuneration Report continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Generally, the amount paid to an individual over the two-year 
retention period represented approximately one year of base pay as at 
the date the retention incentives were granted. Of the executives who 
were eligible for retention incentives, 80% remained with the Company 
for the full duration of the retention period. There are no further cash 
retention arrangements currently in place.

The remuneration of the CEO is governed by his contract of 
employment. At the 2011 Annual General Meeting, shareholders 
approved a one off allocation of performance rights valued at  
$2.7 million as part of the contract. The rights will vest subject to 
meeting a range of objectives including: a total shareholder return 
hurdle (TSR), a CAGR EPS hurdle (described on page 53 and 54 of 
this report), a service hurdle and the delivery of a Board endorsed 
succession plan for the CEO role.

Future focus for executive reward

The Board has considered each element of KMP reward having regard 
to the experience and outcomes achieved since its last review during 
2010. In September 2012, the Board has also considered advice from 
its independent advisor Mercer on the relative position of KMP at Myer 
to relevant comparator companies.

Overall, the Board has determined that notwithstanding the impact 
of a range of factors on business results since 2010 it is clear that 
the current mix of reward for the KMP has not delivered the desired 
outcome the Board had hoped for in ensuring attraction and 
retention, alignment with shareholder interests and a reasonable 
likelihood of achievement in the prevailing circumstances.

Specifically, the base rates for KMP have at best remained static 
compared to overall market comparators and in some cases also 
remains below our target objective of a median market level. Short 
term incentive structures remain above market level as a percentage 
of Total Fixed Compensation; however, due to high targets set as a 
gate to performance in challenging circumstances, have failed to 
deliver any reward at all for two consecutive years. A consequence 
of the combination of these factors is that our base rate for KMP 
generally remains too low and our STI percentage to target is too 
high. Long term incentive through the various Myer Equity Incentive 
Plans established since 2009 have also failed to deliver equity-based 
outcomes to the KMP against the performance targets initially set 
at the time of grant. Those plans that remain in place are also not 
projected to deliver outcomes as intended due to the considerably 
changed environment for retailers generally.

While in isolation the Board may have determined that having one 
element of KMP reward “underperforming” was sustainable in the 
short-term, having each element consistently underperforming its 
intended outcome is unsustainable and not in the interests of either 
the KMP or shareholders.

Given this the Board has considered the combination of factors 
governing each reward component and the interaction between 
elements. Consequently a number of changes to executive reward 
will be made for the FY2013 year.

Base Pay – base pay for some KMP, other than the CEO and Non-
Executive Directors, will be adjusted to more clearly position the KMP 
at the market level the Board consider appropriate. This will result in 
larger base adjustments during FY2013 than may otherwise have  
been applied.

Short Term Incentive – a revised Executive Incentive Plan (EIP) will 
apply in FY2013 to the KMP and certain other senior executives. In 
FY2012 a single metric, NPAT, applied to annual incentive. For FY2013 
three metrics will be considered to determine any incentive payment. 
NPAT will remain the primary metric weighted at 40% of the total 
potential reward, sales growth will be the second metric also weighted 
at 40% and achievement of various objectives we have established  
for our omni-channel development weighted at 20% will be the  
final metric.

The Board has also determined that given the increases to apply to 
base pay, that the percentage of TFC applying to KMP for annual bonus 
payments will be reduced from 70% to 60% for FY2013. This rate also 
better reflects market comparator rates for annual incentives at this level. 
The bonus percentage applying to the CEO will remain unchanged at 
100% of TFC. This rate was determined as part of the review of the CEO 
contract during 2011 and remains appropriate for the duration of the 
contract term. The revised metrics of NPAT, Sales and Omni-channel will 
be applied to the CEO annual incentive in FY2013 as well.

Long Term Incentive – a revised Executive Equity Incentive Plan 
(EEIP) will also be applied to the KMP for the grant of performance 
rights under the FY2013 plan. The EEIP will continue to have two 
performance hurdles applied. Relative TSR performance against index 
of comparator companies will be used to determine vesting of 50% of 
the rights after the conclusion of the three-year performance period. 
The second metric to apply will be the compound annual growth rate 
in earnings per share (CAGR EPS) for Myer shares over the same three-
year performance period. The CAGR EPS metric will be altered for the 
FY2013 plan to reflect the more challenging environment for retail 
businesses and the circumstances faced by Myer. The range of CAGR 
EPS used in the last plan was a range between 5% and 10%, with 
zero vesting below 5% and 100% vesting at 10%. This range has been 
altered for the FY2013 plan to apply between 2% and 7% CAGR EPS 
with zero vesting below 2% and 100% vesting at 7% CAGR EPS.

The Board considers the changes to be appropriate, balancing the 
objectives set for the KMP, the need to create a plan with a reasonable 
likelihood of vesting of some reward and the interests of shareholders 
in the prevailing retail environment.

No changes will apply to the equity grant made to the CEO in 2011. 
The terms of that one-off grant, including performance metrics agreed 
at that time, will remain as originally determined.

The Board considers the changes made to each of the elements of 
reward for the KMP to be appropriate and a better reflection of the 
overall reward objectives, relevant market comparators and in the 
interests of shareholders.

Service agreements
On appointment to the Board, all Non-Executive Directors sign a letter 
of appointment. The letter summarises the Board policies and terms 
relevant to the office of director (including remuneration).

Remuneration and other terms of employment for the CEO and the other 
executive KMPs are also formalised in service agreements. Each of these 
agreements prescribes a base or fixed remuneration amount, a short 
term incentive reward subject to the MAIP, other benefits including salary 
sacrificing for vehicle leasing and, when eligible, long term incentive 
reward through participation in the MEIP. Other key provisions of the 
agreements relating to remuneration are summarised below.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

4
9

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The termination provisions for the executive KMP are described below:

Name

B Brookes

Contract type

Fixed term –  
ending on 31 Aug 2014

M Ashby

Rolling Contract

M Goddard3

Rolling Contract

G Travers

N Abboud4

Rolling Contract

Rolling Contract

Base salary including 
superannuation1 
$

Termination notice 
period initiated 
by KMP

Termination notice 
period initiated 
by the Company

Termination payment 
where initiated  
by the Company

1,800,000

6 months

12 months

12 months2

600,000

475,000

600,000

485,000

3 months

3 months

3 months

3 months

6 months

6 months

6 months

6 months

6 months

6 months

6 months

6 months

1  Base salaries (TFC) quoted as at 28 July 2012.
2 

 B Brookes’ contract provides that, subject to certain performance conditions being satisfied, if the contract runs through to term (31 August 2014) a cessation payment of  
12 months average base TFC over the last three years may be made. B Brookes’ LTI offer contained in his contract of employment provides for entitlements on termination  
in certain circumstances. These provisions were approved by shareholders at the 2011 Annual General Meeting.

3  M Goddard was appointed 13 March 2012.
4  N Abboud ceased employment on 18 September 2012.

The remuneration of Non-Executive and Executive Directors and KMPs

The following tables have been prepared in accordance with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001 (Cth). They show details of the nature 
and amount of each element of the remuneration paid or awarded for services provided in this period. In the case of share-based payments and 
retention incentives, the amounts disclosed reflect the amount expensed during the year in accordance with relevant accounting standards 
and accordingly this does not necessarily reflect the amount actually paid to the individual during the year, which may be more or less than the 
amount shown in the table. 

The following table shows the remuneration amounts recorded in the financial statements in the period.

Short-term employee benefits

Post  
employ-
ment  
benefits

Long-term benefits

Total  
remu-
neration 
expense

Share-
based 
payments

Cash  
salary & 
fees1 
$

Bonus / 
incentive 
STI2 
$

Non- 
monetary 
benefits 
$

Super-  
annuation4 
$ 

Other3 
$

Subtotal 
$

Name

Long 
service 
leave 
$

Retention 
bonus5 
$

Term- 
ination  
& other 
payments 
$

Excluding 
share-
based 
payments6 
$

Options7 
$

Total  
remu-
neration 
expense 
$

non-executive Directors

H McDonald

2012

2011

A Brennan 

2012

2011

T Flood8 

2012

2011

C Froggatt 

2012

2011

P Hay 

2012

2011

R Myer

2012

2011

 484,225 

 484,753 

 164,225 

 164,801 

 106,708 

 136,500 

 150,150 

 93,176 

 136,500 

 136,500 

 136,500 

 145,056 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

executive Director

B Brookes

2012

2011

 1,738,700 

 1,629,652 

 – 

 – 

 131,776 

 133,357 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

0
5

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 15,775 

 500,000 

 15,247 

 500,000 

 15,775 

 180,000 

 15,199 

 180,000 

 10,554 

 117,262 

 13,500 

 150,000 

 14,850 

 165,000 

 9,215 

 102,391 

 13,500 

 150,000 

 13,500 

 150,000 

 13,500 

 150,000 

 14,346 

 159,402 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 46,200 

 1,916,676 

 84,623 

 50,048 

 1,813,057 

 47,772 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 500,000 

 500,000 

 – 

 500,000 

 3,187 

 503,187 

 180,000 

 180,000 

 – 

 – 

 180,000 

 180,000 

 117,262 

 150,000 

 – 

 117,262 

 1,195 

 151,195 

 165,000 

 102,391 

 150,000 

 150,000 

 150,000 

 159,402 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 165,000 

 102,391 

 150,000 

 150,000 

 150,000 

 159,402 

 – 

 2,001,299 

 1,083,421 

 3,084,720 

 – 

 1,860,829 

(947,404) 

 913,425 

Remuneration Report continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Short-term employee benefits

Post  
employ-
ment  
benefits

Long-term benefits

Total  
remu-
neration 
expense

Share-
based 
payments

Cash  
salary & 
fees1 
$

Bonus / 
incentive 
STI2 
$

Non- 
monetary 
benefits 
$

Super-  
annuation4 
$ 

Other3 
$

Subtotal 
$

Name

Long 
service 
leave 
$

Retention 
bonus5 
$

Term- 
ination  
& other 
payments 
$

Excluding 
share-
based 
payments6 
$

Options7 
$

Total  
remu-
neration 
expense 
$

Key Management personnel

M Ashby

2012

2011

M Goddard9

2012

2011

G Travers

2012

2011

N Abboud10

2012

2011

P Winn11

2012

2011

 511,231 

 466,273 

 139,159 

 – 

 566,725 

 544,753 

 451,250 

 444,753 

 313,138 

 536,553 

totals 2012 4,898,511 

totals 2011 4,782,770 

 –

 – 

 –

 – 

 –

 – 

 – 

 – 

 –

 – 

 – 

 – 

 2,442 

 1,856 

 103 

 – 

 2,080 

 1,856 

 2,080 

 33,567 

 917 

 1,856 

 139,398 

 172,492 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 47,935 

 561,608 

 22,561 

 41,250 

 48,727 

 516,856 

 8,401 

 207,500 

 4,780 

 144,042 

 – 

 – 

 979 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 15,775 

 584,580 

 27,995 

 41,250 

 15,247 

 561,856 

 15,806 

 207,500 

 25,000 

 478,330 

 22,729 

 41,250 

 15,247 

 493,567 

 11,412 

 207,500 

 6,932 

 320,987 

(14,499) 

 41,250 

 23,447 

 561,856 

 8,510 

 207,500 

 – 

 – 

 –

 – 

 –

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 625,419 

 71,944 

 697,363 

 732,757 

(74,290) 

 658,467 

 145,021 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 145,021 

 – 

 653,825 

 45,203 

 699,028 

 785,162 

(133,824)

 651,338 

 542,309 

 84,969 

 627,278 

 712,479 

(85,233) 

 627,246 

 347,738 

(127,021)

 220,717 

 777,866 

(68,960) 

 708,906 

 230,576  5,268,485 

 144,388 

 165,000 

 –  5,577,873   1,158,516 

 6,736,389 

 233,723  5,188,985 

 91,901 

 830,000 

 –   6,110,886  (1,305,329)   4,805,557 

1  Cash salary includes short-term compensated absences, consideration for vehicle salary sacrifice and fees including allowances for Committee ‘chair’ responsibilities for 

A Brennan and C Froggatt.

2  STI payments relate to program performance and conditions for the year they were earned, not the year of actual payment. Due to performance, no STI payments were 

earned in the FY2012 year under the MAIP.

3  Other payments for B Brookes include payments for rental subsidy and certain other services in relation to provision of accommodation. Other payments also includes  

Company-paid FBT expenses.

4  There were no post-employment benefits paid other than superannuation. 
5  N Abboud, M Ashby, G Travers, and P Winn had retention incentives incorporated into their employment contracts in September 2009 to apply after the listing of Myer. The 
amount shown represents the proportion of the total bonus payable that has been expensed in the current financial year in accordance with Accounting Standards. These 
incentives were paid only in the event the executive meets the conditions of the retention arrangements, which included continuing service and meeting performance 
standards as established by the Company. The incentives were paid in two parts totalling $500,000 (for N Abboud, M Ashby, G Travers and P Winn), the first payment of 
$170,000 was made 1 November 2010 and the second payment of $330,000 was made on 1 November 2011. The amount described reflects the amount amortised in FY2012.

6  Total remuneration expense excluding share-based payments reflects the accounting expense treatment of base salary, any bonuses or short term incentive payments,  

Fringe Benefit Tax expenses, superannuation, the balance of long service leave accruals, retention payments and any termination benefits in the reporting period.

7  Remuneration in relation to share options represents the amount expensed for the period based on valuations determined under AASB 2 Share-based Payments. This expense 
is based on the fair value at grant date, and reflects expectations of the number of options expected to vest. Where expectations change in relation to vesting, adjustment 
is made in the current period to reflect this change, which in FY2011 resulted in the write-back of prior period expenses, and therefore a negative remuneration amount for 
B Brookes and the KMP. As the equity grant may fully vest, partially vest or not vest at all, the benefit that the KMP ultimately realises is likely to be different to the amount 
disclosed in a particular year. The amount disclosed does not represent cash payments received in the period, and if vesting conditions are not met may result in reversal  
of the remuneration amount in a future period. There were no other equity-settled share-based payments and there were no cash-settled share-based payments.

8  T Flood retired as a director on 11 April 2012.
9  M Goddard was appointed on 13 March 2012.
10 N Abboud ceased employment with Myer on 18 September 2012.
11 P Winn ceased employment with Myer on 8 December 2011.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

5
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
STI and LTI remuneration
The table below sets out the relative proportion of remuneration for the Executive Director and other KMP that is linked to performance and the 
proportion which is fixed. 

Total
remuneration
 expense

Total fixed remuneration

At risk – STI

At risk – LTI1

Name

$

$

%

$

%

$

%

$

%

Share options

Retention incentive

executive Director

B Brookes

2012

2011

 3,084,720 

 2,001,299 

 913,425 

 1,860,829 

Key Management personnel

M Ashby

2012

2011

M Goddard2

2012

2011

G Travers

2012

2011

N Abboud3

2012

2011

P Winn4

2012

2011

 697,363 

 584,169 

 658,467 

 525,257 

 145,021 

 145,021 

 – 

 – 

 699,028 

 612,575 

 651,338 

 577,662 

 627,278 

 501,059 

 627,246 

 504,979 

 220,717 

 306,488 

 708,906 

 570,366 

totals 2012

 5,474,127 

 4,150,611 

totals 2011

 3,559,382 

 4,039,093 

65

204

84

80

100

0

88

89

80

81

139

80

76

113

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

 1,083,421 

(947,404) 

35

(104)

 – 

 – 

 71,944 

(74,290) 

10

(11)

 41,250 

 207,500 

 – 

 – 

 45,203 

(133,824) 

 84,969 

(85,233) 

(127,021) 

(68,960) 

 1,158,516 

0

0

6

 – 

 – 

 41,250 

(21)

 207,500 

13

(14)

(58)

(9)

21

 41,250 

 207,500 

 41,250 

 207,500 

 165,000 

0 (1,309,711)

(36)

 830,000 

0

0

6

31

0

0

6

32

7

33

19

29

3

23

1  LTI was provided through the issue of options to individual executives under the MEIP. LTI allotments have been independently valued as at the date the option was granted 
to the executive. The proportions shown represent the amount expensed for the period under AASB 2 Share-based Payments as a proportion of total remuneration expense 
for the period. This amount also includes the current expense in relation to the retention bonuses. It does not reflect a cash payment to the executive under MEIP.

2  M Goddard was appointed 13 March 2012.
3  N Abboud ceased employment with Myer on 18 September 2012.
4  P Winn ceased employment with Myer on 8 December 2011.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

2
5

Remuneration Report continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Long Term Incentives – 2012 grant
In 2011, the Board approved a long term incentive plan, which is designed to encourage Myer’s senior executives to create and deliver sustained 
shareholder returns and to reward executives. The plan involves the grant of performance rights under the MEIP, which provide the executive 
with the right to acquire a share in the Company if certain performance conditions are satisfied. 

The number of performance rights that vest will depend on how well Myer has performed during the performance period. For superior 
performance, 100 percent of the performance rights will vest. Only a percentage of performance rights will vest for performance below that level.  
If Myer does not achieve certain minimum thresholds then all the performance rights will lapse and no performance rights can vest.

The following table summarises the 2012 performance rights grants made to Key Management Personnel in October 2011. 

Value of  
options at 
grant date 
$

Valuation  
of each  
option at  
grant date 
$

Number  
of options 
granted

Exercise  
price 
$

141,000

141,000

171,000

171,000

171,000

171,000

1.67

1.08

1.67

1.08

1.67

1.08

84,431

130,555

102,395

158,333

102,395

158,333

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

Applicable 
hurdles

EPS Hurdle

TSR Hurdle

EPS Hurdle

TSR Hurdle

EPS Hurdle

TSR Hurdle

Potential time of vesting

End of perf. period – July 2014

End of perf. period – July 2014

End of perf. period – July 2014

End of perf. period – July 2014

End of perf. period – July 2014

End of perf. period – July 2014

KMP

N Abboud1

N Abboud1

M Ashby

M Ashby

G Travers

G Travers

1  N Abboud ceased employment with Myer on 18 September 2012 and all options lapsed.

The plan involved the grant of performance rights under the MEIP, which provide the executive with the right to acquire a share in the Company 
if certain performance conditions are satisfied. The performance rights were granted to the executives participating in the MEIP at no cost and 
there is no cost to those executives if the performance rights are exercised.

Before the performance rights can be exercised, certain performance conditions need to be satisfied. These performance conditions are based 
on Myer’s performance over a three-year period. If Myer performs better than its identified peer companies and certain minimum thresholds 
over that period are met then shareholders will benefit and executives will benefit as well by being provided with shares in the Company when 
the performance rights are exercised. The number of performance rights that vest will depend on how well Myer has performed during the 
performance period. For superior performance, 100 percent of the performance rights will vest. Only a percentage of performance rights will 
vest for performance below that level. If Myer does not achieve certain minimum thresholds then all the performance rights will lapse and no 
performance rights can vest. If a portion of the performance rights do not vest following the end of the performance period, then that portion 
of the performance rights that are unvested will lapse immediately and there will be no retesting at a later date.

During the performance period, participants will not be able to sell, assign or otherwise deal in their performance rights. They will not be entitled 
to any dividends or distributions or exercise any voting rights. Generally, the performance rights will lapse on cessation of employment if they have 
not been exercised (whether vested or unvested before that time). Subject to applicable law, the Board has the power to allow an executive to keep 
some, or all of their performance rights on cessation (although the discretion is only likely to be exercised, if at all, in exceptional circumstances).

FY2012 MEIP performance conditions
Other than for the CEO, who has additional hurdles as noted below, there are two performance conditions that apply to the FY2012 performance 
rights based on EPS and TSR performance. The performance rights are allocated on an equal weighting of 50 percent to each of the EPS Hurdle 
and the TSR Hurdle which are described below and these will be assessed separately, meaning that both hurdles do not need to be satisfied for 
any of an executive’s performance rights to vest. This means that it is possible for some or all of the performance rights with an EPS Hurdle to 
vest, while none of the performance rights with a TSR Hurdle vest (and vice versa).

The EPS Hurdle
The EPS Hurdle seeks to align the interests of the holders of performance rights with the financial performance of the Company. It does this by 
providing that the EPS performance rights can only be exercised if the Company achieves the EPS Hurdle that has been set by the Board. The EPS 
Hurdle is based on a minimum achieved compound annual growth rate (CAGR) in the Company’s fully diluted EPS over the performance period. 
The base number will be the Company’s fully diluted EPS calculated on the Company’s final audited results for the financial year ended 30 July 
2011. The CAGR from this base will be calculated on the Company’s fully diluted EPS using the Company’s final audited results for the financial 
year ending 26 July 2014. The resulting CAGR will be used to determine the level of vesting for the performance rights with an EPS Hurdle.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

5
3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The table below sets out the percentage of performance rights that will vest depending on the Company’s performance against the EPS Hurdle 
over the performance period, with a linear progression through the various threshold points.

EPS Hurdle rate
(compound annual growth  
over the performance period)

Less than 5 percent

At 5 percent

From 5 to 10 percent pro-rata vesting of rights

Proportion of EPS performance rights that will vest*

Nil

50 percent of the number of EPS performance rights

Pro-rata with a linear progression between 50 percent and up to 100 percent of the number 
of EPS performance rights

e.g. at 7 percent compound annual growth rate, 70 percent of EPS performance rights vest

10 percent or greater

100 percent of the number of EPS performance rights

*The number of performance rights will be rounded down to the nearest whole number.

For the FY2013 grant of performance rights the Board has considered the CAGR EPS Hurdle with regard to the operating plan and financial 
objectives and the CAGR EPS hurdle will be adjusted to reflect these parameters with CAGR EPS annual rates being altered to 2 percent to 
7 percent.

The TSR Hurdle
The TSR Hurdle also seeks to align the interests of the holders of performance rights with the interests of the Company’s shareholders. It does 
this by providing that the performance rights will only be exercised if the TSR for shares compares favourably to the TSR for investments in a peer 
group of companies. The Board has established a peer group of companies against which the Company’s TSR performance will be compared. 
TSR is a measure of the return or growth in the value of a share to a shareholder over a performance period on a share held for that period. It 
is the annualised return to shareholders, including all share price changes and reinvestment of distributions (including dividends). This figure 
is calculated pre-tax and combines share price and distributions (including dividends) paid to show the total return to the shareholder. The 
calculation assumes that the distribution is reinvested into shares on the day it is paid and at the close price on that day.

TSR was chosen as a performance measure after the Board sought independent remuneration advice from Mercer during the 2011 financial year. 
TSR was considered a relevant market-based performance measure used by many ASX listed companies.

The Board also considered the TSR Hurdle and determined that the current metric remains relevant for FY2013.

The TSR peer group
The table below sets out the peer group for the FY2012 MEIP offer. If any of these organisations cease to exist as entities at any time during the 
performance period, the size of the peer group may be maintained by additions determined by the Board.

In selecting the TSR peer group, the Board sought independent advice from Mercer. The composition of the group reflects measures of relative 
sales and market capitalisation as well as industry type that is complementary in nature to the Company’s business. It includes companies that 
are consumer facing, have a service orientation and/or are retail in nature with either product or services provided as part of their core offer.

Entity – peer group

Air New Zealand Ltd

AP Eagers Ltd

Australian Pharmaceutical Industries Ltd

Automotive Holdings Group Ltd

Bendigo and Adelaide Bank Ltd

Billabong International Ltd

Coca-Cola Amatil Ltd

Harvey Norman Holdings Ltd

Pacific Brands Ltd

Tatts Group Ltd

Woolworths Ltd

Breville Group Ltd

David Jones Ltd

JB Hi-Fi Ltd

Premier Investments Ltd

Oroton Group Ltd

Wesfarmers Ltd

STW Communications Group Ltd

Flight Centre Ltd

Metcash Ltd

Tabcorp Holdings Ltd

Specialty Fashion Group Ltd

GUD Holdings Ltd

As a consequence of the takeover of Foster’s Group Ltd by SAB Miller in December 2011, Foster’s Group Ltd ceased to be part of the peer 
group for the purposes of LTI awards made in FY2012, leaving 23 comparator companies. Under the terms of the plan if any of the peer group 
organisations cease to exist as entities at any time during the performance period, the size of the peer group may be maintained by additions 
determined by the Myer Board. The Board considered the organisations in the peer group and determined that the size of the peer group (23)  
did not warrant any additions.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

4
5

Remuneration Report continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The table below sets out the percentage of the performance rights subject to a TSR Hurdle that will vest depending on the Company’s 
performance against the TSR Hurdle over the performance period. For any of these performance rights to vest, the Company’s TSR performance 
needs to be at least at the 50th percentile of the peer group for the performance period.

TSR percentile ranking

Proportion of TSR performance rights that will vest

Below 50th 

From 50th to 75th 

75th and above

Nil

Pro-rata with a linear progression between 50 percent and up to 100 percent of the number 
of TSR performance rights

100 percent 

The performance rights offered to the CEO in 2011 under the MEIP have the same EPS Hurdle and TSR Hurdle although there will be two 
additional hurdles that the CEO must satisfy before any of these performance rights can be exercised, regardless of performance against the TSR 
and EPS Hurdles. These additional hurdles require the CEO to develop and deliver a succession plan for the role of the CEO by the conclusion of 
the performance period and to comply with the terms of his employment contract.

The Board has established a framework with the CEO that sets out the Board’s expectations on delivery of a succession plan. This includes regular 
milestone reviews to assess progress against the succession plan.

If the succession plan is delivered before the expiry of the performance period and the Board elects to terminate the CEO’s new contract early, 
the CEO may retain a pro-rated number of performance rights based on completed months of service of the contract period. Any pro-rata 
performance rights earned by the CEO must be retained until the expiry of the full performance period of three years, unless, subject to Board 
approval, there is a request by the CEO to exercise a proportion of his rights to meet any tax liability from the vesting of the rights.

Testing the TSR and EPS Hurdles
Following the end of the performance period for performance rights and after the Company has lodged its full year audited financial results for 
2014 with the ASX, the Board will test the performance conditions and will determine how many performance rights (if any) are eligible to vest. 
There will be no retesting of the performance conditions at a later date if they are not fully satisfied.

Historical grants
The Company’s LTI plan previously involved the grant of either options or performance rights under the MEIP. Under the terms of those plans, 
senior executives can only exercise their options or performance rights once the vesting conditions are satisfied. Executives who then wish to 
exercise any of their vested options must pay the relevant exercise price after which shares in the Company are provided to them. In the case 
of performance rights, if vesting conditions are met, the right automatically vests and a share in the Company is provided to them at no cost. 
Option or rights holders do not have the right to participate in any securities issues made by the Company although, consistent with the ASX 
Listing Rules; there is provision for adjustments in the event of certain capital actions made by the Company.

Since 2006, six offers of options and one offer of performance rights have been made to selected executives under the MEIP. Details of options 
granted under the MEIP that remain unvested as at 28 July 2012 are set out in the table below.

Financial 
year of offer

2008 

2009 

2009 

2009 

2009 

2009 

2010 (CEO EPS options)

2010 (CEO share price options)

2010 (Snr Executive EPS options)

2011

2012 (CEO Performance EPS rights)

2012 (CEO Performance TSR rights)

2012 (Snr Executive EPS rights)

2012 (Snr Executive TSR rights)

total

Number  
of unvested 
options1 

Exercise  
price 
$

Grant date

Value per  
option at 
grant date  
$

Vesting date  
(if option holder  
remains employed by a  
Myer Group company)

Expiry date

23 Jan 2008

2,241,505

17 Dec 2008

403,000

17 Dec 2008

2,165,063

30 Jun 2009

30 Jun 2009

30 Jun 2009

6 Nov 2009

6 Nov 2009

6 Nov 2009

9 Dec 2011

9 Dec 2011

21 Oct 2011

21 Oct 2011

190,800

190,800

2,772,300

5,152,671

2,227,723

2,521,009

808,383

1,250,000

1,297,858

2,006,646

23,227,758

3.00

2.14

2.14

2.34

2.34

2.34

4.10

5.74

4.10

0.37

0.43

0.43

0.49

0.49

0.49

1.31

1.01

1.19

no grants were made

Nil

Nil

Nil

Nil

1.67

1.08

1.67

1.08

31 Jul 2012

21 Dec 2012

31 Jul 2012

24 Oct 2013

31 Jul 2013

24 Oct 2013

31 Jul 2012

24 Oct 2014

31 Jul 2013

24 Oct 2014

31 Jul 2014

24 Oct 2014

End of perf. periods

31 Dec 2013

End of perf. periods

31 Dec 2013

End of perf. period

31 Dec 2012

End of perf. period

31 Oct 2014

End of perf. period

31 Oct 2014

End of perf. period

31 Oct 2014

End of perf. period

31 Oct 2014

1 

In addition to the unvested options noted above, 4,428,275 options that have vested remain unexercised with a total of 27,656,033 options still on issue.  
Refer note 35 for details.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

5
5

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2011 grants
No grants were made in financial year 2011.

2010 grants Tranche A to D (CEO only)
 ›

In November 2009, the Board approved an additional grant of options under the MEIP to Mr Brookes to the value of $9,000,000 (valued as at 
the grant date of 6 November 2009). The options were granted in four tranches, at no cost to Mr Brookes, and formed the long term incentive 
component of Mr Brookes’ remuneration under his then new long term incentive arrangements. The independent valuation of each tranche 
of these options at the time of grant and the resulting number of options granted is shown in the following table. In total Mr Brookes was 
granted 7,380,394 options under these LTI arrangements.
Three-quarters of the options are subject to a performance hurdle based on Myer’s fully diluted earnings per share (EPS) (EPS Options) and 
one quarter of the options are subject to a performance hurdle based on Myer’s share price (Share Price Options). Vesting of the options is 
also subject to a service condition – vesting will be subject to Mr Brookes remaining employed by the Group until the end of the relevant 
performance period. Each option is an entitlement to one share upon payment of the exercise price. For the EPS Options, the exercise price  
is $4.10 per option and for the Share Price Options, the exercise price $5.74 per option. Options which do not satisfy the vesting conditions 
will lapse on the expiry date.
The Board considered that a combination of EPS and share price performance were the most appropriate hurdles for these options. In 
particular, the EPS Hurdle measures compound annual growth (CAGR) in EPS and was chosen based on a review of then market practice  
and the then lack of a valid peer group against which to measure the Group’s performance on other hurdles such as Total Shareholder Return 
(TSR). Share price growth was selected to encourage Mr Brookes to focus on delivering results that lead to an improvement in the share price 
of Myer above the IPO price.

 ›

 ›

Performance hurdles for 2010 grants – Tranche A to D (CEO only)
Set out below is a summary of performance hurdles and performance periods applicable to each component of the CEO grant

Financial 
year of grant

2010  
Tranche A

2010 
Tranche B

2010  
Tranche C

2010  
Tranche D

Value of  
options at  
rant date 
$

5,400,000

Valuation  
of each  
option at  
grant date 
$

Number  
of options 
granted

Exercise  
price 
$

Applicable  
hurdles

Potential  
time of vesting

1.31

4,122,137

4.10

EPS Hurdle1

1,350,000

1.31

1,030,534

4.10

1,800,000

1.01

1,782,178

5.74

450,000

1.01

 445,545

5.74

EPS Hurdle1 and 
extended  
12 month  
service condition

Share Price  
Hurdle2 

Share Price Hurdle3 
and extended  
12 month  
service condition

End of First Performance Period.  
Retesting at end of Second 
Performance Period

End of Second Performance Period

End of First Performance Period. 
Retesting at end of Second 
Performance Period

End of Second Performance Period

1  For both 2010 Tranche A and B options, performance against the EPS Hurdle has been measured at the end of the First Performance Period. The EPS Hurdle was not met 
at the end of the First Performance Period, the Tranche A and B options will be retested at the end of the Second Performance Period, measuring the Company’s annual 
compound growth in EPS over the Second Performance Period applying the vesting schedule. 

2  For 2010 Tranche C options, performance against the Share Price Hurdle has been measured at the end of the First Performance Period. The Share Price Hurdle was not  

met at the end of the First Performance Period, the 2010 Tranche C options will be retested at the end of the Second Performance Period.

3  For 2010 D options, performance against the Share Price Hurdle will be measured at the end of the Second Performance Period.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

6
5

Remuneration Report continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Performance periods for the CEO’s 2010 options are as follows:
 ›
 ›

the First Performance Period is the three financial years ending July 2012; and 
the Second Performance Period is the four financial years ending July 2013.

The vesting schedule and performance hurdles for the CEO’s 2010 EPS options are as follows:

Compound annual growth rate in EPS over the performance period

Proportion of EPS options that will vest

At 10 percent

33.33 percent

Between 10 percent and 12.5 percent

Pro-rata vesting between 33.33 percent and 66.66 percent

At 12.5 percent

Between 12.5 percent and 15 percent

At or above 15 percent

66.66 percent

Pro-rata vesting between 66.66 percent and 100 percent

100 percent

The base EPS used for the purpose of determining the compound annual growth rate is 23.5 cents, representing FY2009 fully diluted EPS, 
adjusted to a proforma basis consistent with the capital structure of the Group post IPO.

The Share Price Options hurdle will be satisfied if the market price of the Company’s shares exceeds $5.74 at the end of the relevant performance 
period. For these purposes, the market price of the Company’s shares will be the volume weighted average price of the shares quoted on the 
ASX over one calendar month prior to the expiry of the relevant performance period.

Assessment
At the end of each performance period, the Committee reviews the Company’s audited financial results and the results of the other performance 
measures and assesses performance against each measure to determine the percentage of the options (if any) that will vest. 

As at the date of this report these options are not likely to vest as the EPS target is unlikely to be achieved.

2010 Tranche E – offered to senior executives (other than the CEO) in November 2009
In November 2009, the Board approved a grant of options under MEIP to selected individuals to the value of $4,100,000 (valued as at the grant 
date of 6 November 2009). These options were independently valued at $1.19 each as at the date of grant, resulting in a grant of 3,445,379 
options in total. These options were subject to satisfaction of an EPS performance hurdle based on a compound annual growth rate in EPS of 
10% over the performance period ended 28 July 2012. These options will lapse to the extent the EPS performance hurdle is not satisfied. The EPS 
hurdle was selected as an appropriate measure to create and deliver sustainable shareholder returns.

As with other options granted under the MEIP, each option entitles the holder to acquire one fully paid ordinary share in the Company, subject to 
the satisfaction of the relevant performance conditions and the payment of the exercise price. For the 2010 Tranche E Options the exercise price 
is $4.10. The performance period for these options expired on 28 July 2012 and the performance metrics are tested on the audited results of the 
three-year performance period. As at the date of this report these options are not likely to vest as the EPS target is unlikely to be achieved.

The following table summarises the 2010 Tranche E grants made to Key Management Personnel in November 2009. 

Value of  
options at 
grant date 
$

500,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

Valuation  
of each  
option at  
grant date 
$

Number  
of options 
granted

Exercise  
price 
$

1.19

1.19

1.19

1.19

420,168

420,168

420,168

420,168

4.10

4.10

4.10

4.10

Applicable 
hurdles

EPS Hurdle

EPS Hurdle

EPS Hurdle

EPS Hurdle

Potential time of vesting

End of perf. period – July 2012

End of perf. period – July 2012

End of perf. period – July 2012

End of perf. period – July 2012

KMP

M Ashby

G Travers

N Abboud1

P Winn2

1  N Abboud ceased employment with Myer on 18 September 2012 and all options will lapse in accordance with the terms of the relevant plan.
2  P Winn ceased employment with Myer on 8 December 2011 and all options lapsed.

The applicable performance period was the three financial years for the Company ending July 2012.

The calculation of the compound annual growth rate in EPS is based on growth from the proforma FY2009 fully diluted EPS of 23.5 cents, 
consistent with 2010 Tranche A and 2010 Tranche B grants to the CEO described above.

Details of options over ordinary shares in the Company currently provided as remuneration and granted during the current year to each director 
and each of KMP are set out on page 59 of this report. Further information on the MEIP is set out in note 35 to the financial statements.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

5
7

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Remuneration Report continued

Summary of options granted, vested and lapsed for the reporting period 

Name

Number  
of options  
granted during  
the period

Directors of Myer Holdings limited

Value of  
options  
at grant date

Number of  
options vested  
during the period2

Number of  
options lapsed  
during the period

Value at  
lapsed date
$

H McDonald

B Brookes

A Brennan

T Flood

C Froggatt

P Hay

R Myer 

–

2,058,383

–

2,700,000

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

342,000

–

342,000

282,000

–

Key Management personnel of the Company 

M Ashby

M Goddard

G Travers

N Abboud

P Winn1

260,728

–

260,728

214,986

–

26,667

–

–

10,000

–

–

–

333,333

–

58,668

35,868

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

1,320,168

368,475

1  P Winn ceased employment with Myer on 8 December 2011.

The assessed fair value at grant date of options granted to KMP is allocated equally over the period from grant date to vesting date, and the 
amount is included in the remuneration tables above. Fair values at grant date are independently determined using an option pricing model  
that takes into account the exercise price, the term of the option, the impact of dilution, the share price at grant date and expected price 
volatility of the underlying share, the expected dividend yield and the risk-free interest rate for the term of the option.

Shares provided on exercise of options
Details of ordinary shares in the Company provided as a result of the exercise of options to each director of the Company and KMPs are set out below.

Name

Directors of Myer Holdings limited

H McDonald

B Brookes

A Brennan

T Flood

C Froggatt

P Hay

R Myer 

Key Management personnel of the Company 

N Abboud

M Ashby

M Goddard

G Travers

P Winn

Number of ordinary  
shares provided on  
exercise of options  
during the period1

Value at  
exercise date2
$

26,667

–

–

10,000

–

–

–

5,868

–

–

58,668

–

21,600 

–

–

8,500

–

 – 

–

12,088

–

–

120,856

–

1 

 The value at exercise date of options that were granted in prior periods as part of remuneration and were exercised during the year has been determined as the intrinsic 
value of the options at that date. This represents the excess of market value of the share acquired over the exercise price paid. 

2  The number of shares provided on exercise of options are on a one for one basis.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

8
5

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The amounts paid per ordinary share by directors and other KMP on the exercise of options at the date of exercise were as follows:

Financial 
year of grant

2008

2007

Number of ordinary 
shares provided on 
exercise of options 
during the period

36,667

64,536

Amount paid 
 per share  
on exercise  
of options
$

1.27

0.01

No amounts are unpaid on any shares provided on the exercise of options.

Details of remuneration: bonuses and share-based compensation benefits
For each bonus, grant of options or grant of performance rights included in this report, the percentage of the available bonus or grant that was 
paid, or that vested, in the financial year, and the percentage and value that was forfeited because the person did not meet the service and 
performance criteria is set out below. Bonuses are payable in the year following the period in which they are earned. Options and performance 
rights vest provided the vesting conditions or performance hurdles are met (see pages 53 to 57). No options or performance rights will vest if 
the conditions (either service or performance) are not satisfied, therefore the minimum value of the options or performance rights yet to vest is 
nil. The maximum value of the options or performance rights yet to vest has been determined as the amount of the grant date fair value of the 
options or performance rights that is yet to be expensed. 

STI / Bonus1

Share-based compensation benefits (options)

Achieved 
2012  
%

Forfeited 
2012  
%

–

 Target  
value  
2012  
$

–

Forfeited 
value  
2012  
$

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

100

1,800,000

1,800,000

–

100

100

100

–

–

420,000

420,000

95,000

420,000

95,000

420,000

100

339,500

339,500

100

–

–

Name

H McDonald

B Brookes

T Flood

M Ashby

M Goddard2

G Travers

N Abboud3

P Winn4

Year  
granted

Vested  
%

Forfeited  
%

The remaining 
financial years  
in which  
options  
may vest

Maximum  
total value  
of grant yet  
to vest  
$

2008

2012

2010

2007

2008

2012

2010

2008

–

2012

2010

2007

2012

2010

2009

2008

2007

2010

2009

2008

100

–

–

100

100

–

–

67

–

–

–

100

–

–

–

67

100

–

–

67

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

100

100

100

2012

2015

2013–2014

2011

2012

2015

2013

2012–2013

–

2015

2013

2012

2015

2013

2014–2015

2012–2013

2012

2013

2014–2015

2012–2013

–

1,041,124

118,812

–

–

125,797

–

–

–

125,797

–

–

103,727

–

72,733

–

–

–

–

–

 The % of STIs achieved and forfeited for 2012 are based on performance against ’at target’ performance as explained on page 47.

1 
2  M Goddard was appointed on 13 March 2012.
3  N Abboud ceased employment with Myer on 18 September 2012 and all options will lapse in accordance with the terms of the relevant plan.
4  P Winn ceased employment with Myer on 8 December 2011.

Loans to directors and executives
Information on any loans to directors and executives, including amounts, interest rates and repayment terms are set out in note 24(c)  
to the financial statements.

Dealing in securities
Under the Company’s Guidelines for Dealing in Securities, directors and senior executives are prohibited from entering into hedging 
arrangements with respect to the Company’s securities. A copy of the Guidelines for Dealing in Securities is available on the Myer website.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

5
9

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
FinanCial report

for the period ended 28 July 2012

Myer Holdings Limited 
ABN 14 119 085 602

Contents 

Financial Report 

  Consolidated income statement 

  Consolidated statement of comprehensive income 

  Consolidated balance sheet 

  Consolidated statement of changes in equity 

  Consolidated statement of cash flows 

Notes to the financial statements 

Directors’ declaration 

Independent auditor’s report 

Auditor’s independence declaration 

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

111

112

114

These financial statements are the consolidated financial statements of the consolidated 
entity consisting of Myer Holdings Limited and its subsidiaries. The financial statements  
are presented in the Australian currency.

Myer Holdings Limited is a company limited by shares, incorporated and domiciled in 
Australia. Its registered office is:
Myer Holdings Limited 
Level 7, 800 Collins Street 
Docklands VIC 3008

A description of the nature of the consolidated entity’s operations and its principal  
activities is included in the Directors’ Report on pages 39 to 43, which is not part of these 
financial statements.

The financial statements were authorised for issue by the directors on 10 October 2012.  
The directors have the power to amend and reissue the financial statements.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

0
6

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated income statement
for the period ended 28 July 2012

total sales value (excluding GSt) 

Concession sales

Sale of goods (excluding GSt) 

Sales revenue deferred under customer loyalty program

revenue from sale of goods (excluding GSt)

Other operating revenue (excluding finance revenue)

Cost of goods sold 

Other income

operating gross profit 

Selling expenses 

Administration expenses 

Store closure and restructuring costs

Write-back of fixed lease rental increases provision

Profit on sale of financial asset

earnings before interest and tax before non-recurring  
Ipo transaction costs and related charges

Finance revenue

Finance costs

net finance costs

profit before income tax before non-recurring Ipo transaction costs and related charges

Income tax expense

profit for the period before non-recurring Ipo transaction costs and related charges

Initial Public Offering (IPO) transaction costs and other non-recurring IPO related charges (after tax)

profit for the period

profit is attributable to:

  Owners of Myer Holdings Limited

  Non-controlling interests

earnings per share for profit from continuing operations  
attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the Company:

Basic earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

The above consolidated income statement should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

Notes

5

5

5

5

5

6

6

5

5

6

7

6

2012  
52 weeks  
$’000

2011  
52 weeks  
$’000

 3,119,119 

 3,158,774 

 (467,207)

 (451,867)

 2,651,912 

 2,706,907 

 (39,212)

 (40,104)

 2,612,700 

 2,666,803 

 113,451 

 109,529 

 (1,464,574)

 (1,551,112)

 26,844 

 46,410 

 1,288,421 

 1,271,630 

 (756,035)

 (302,413)

 (18,450)

 23,109 

 (717,063)

 (295,633)

 (10,476)

 – 

 – 

 11,680 

 234,632 

 260,138 

 4,499 

 (34,263)

 (29,764)

 204,868 

 (63,801)

 141,067 

 – 

 141,067 

 3,266 

 (38,747)

 (35,481)

 224,657 

 (61,470)

 163,187 

 (3,522)

 159,665 

 139,365 

 159,724 

 1,702 

 (59)

 141,067 

 159,665 

Cents

Cents

23.9

23.7

27.4

27.3

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

6
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
for the period ended 28 July 2012

profit for the period
other comprehensive income
Cash flow hedges
Actuarial gains/(losses) on retirement benefit obligation
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations
Income tax relating to components of other comprehensive income

other comprehensive income for the period, net of tax

total comprehensive income for the period

Total comprehensive income for the period is attributable to:
  Owners of Myer Holdings Limited
  Non-controlling interests

The above consolidated statement of comprehensive income should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

Notes

22(b)

22(b)
7(d)

2012 
52 weeks 
$’000

2011 
52 weeks 
$’000

 141,067 

 159,665 

 (509)
 – 
 66 
 (535)

 (978)

 (2,893)
 183 
 (85)
 106 

 (2,689)

 140,089 

 156,976 

 138,317 
 1,772 

 140,089 

 157,121 
 (145)

 156,976 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

2
6

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated balance sheet
as at 28 July 2012

ASSetS
Current assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade and other receivables
Inventories

Total current assets

non-current assets 
Derivative financial instruments
Property, plant and equipment
Deferred tax assets 
Intangible assets
Other

Total non-current assets

total assets

lIABIlItIeS
Current liabilities 
Trade and other payables 
Derivative financial instruments 
Current tax liabilities
Provisions
Other

Total current liabilities

non-current liabilities 
Borrowings 
Derivative financial instruments 
Provisions
Deferred income
Other

Total non-current liabilities

total liabilities

net assets

eQuIty 
Contributed equity
Retained profits/(losses)
Reserves

Capital and reserves attributable to owners of Myer Holdings Limited
Non-controlling interests

total equity

The above consolidated balance sheet should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

Notes

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

8
9
10

11
12
13
14

15
11

16

17
11
19

20

21
22
22

 38,058 
 17,712 
 385,702 

 441,472

 – 
 515,482 
 21,115 
 936,149 
3,975 

 37,274 
 24,385 
 381,261 

 442,920

 258 
 535,139 
 47,380 
 943,880 
 4,554

1,476,721 

 1,531,211

1,918,193 

 1,974,132

 397,137 
 2,490 
15,191 
 85,957 
2,094 

502,869 

 421,193 
 1,785 
 15,439 
69,821 
 29,406 

537,644 

 412,202 
 7,476 
 33,897
 90,586 
 4,199

 548,360

 419,591 
 – 
 49,391 
 62,448
 33,012 

 564,442

 1,040,513

 1,112,802

 877,680

 861,330

 519,776 
 363,357 
 (14,800)

 868,333
 9,347

 877,680

 519,479 
 349,396 
 (15,120)

 853,755
 7,575

 861,330

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

6
3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity
for the period ended 28 July 2012

Balance as at 31 July 2010

total comprehensive income  
for the period

transactions with owners in their  
capacity as owners:

Contributions of equity, net of transaction costs

Put option to acquire non-controlling interest

Non-controlling interest on acquisition  
of subsidiary

Dividends provided for or paid

Employee share options

Balance as at 30 July 2011

total comprehensive income  
for the period

transactions with owners in their  
capacity as owners:

Contributions of equity, net of transaction costs

Dividends provided for or paid

Employee share options

Contributed 
equity  
$’000

Notes

Reserves 
$’000

Retained 
earnings 
$’000

Non- 
controlling 
interests 
$’000

Total 
$’000

 517,128 

 19,842 

 320,470 

 – 

 857,440 

 – 

 (2,872)

 159,907 

 (59)

 156,976 

21

22

23

22

21

23

22

 2,351 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 (31,650)

 – 

 –

 (440)

 – 

 – 

 – 

(130,981) 

 – 

 2,351 

 (32,090)

 (130,981)

 519,479 

 (15,120)

 349,396 

 – 

 – 

 2,351 

 (31,650)

 7,634 

 – 

 – 

 7,634 

 7,575 

 7,634 

(130,981)

 (440)

 (153,086)

 861,330 

 – 

 (1,048)

 139,365 

 1,772 

 140,089 

 297 

 – 

 – 

 297 

 – 

 – 

 1,368 

 1,368 

 – 

 (125,404)

 – 

 (125,404)

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 297 

 (125,404)

 1,368 

 (123,739)

Balance as at 28 July 2012

 519,776 

 (14,800)

 363,357 

 9,347 

 877,680 

The above consolidated statement of changes in equity should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

4
6

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of cash flows
for the period ended 28 July 2012

Cash flows from operating activities 

Receipts from customers (inclusive of goods and services tax)

Payments to suppliers and employees (inclusive of goods and services tax)

Other income

Interest paid

Tax paid

net cash inflow from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities

Proceeds from sale of financial asset

Payments for property, plant and equipment

Acquisition of subsidiary

Acquisition of brands

Payments for intangible assets

Proceeds from sale of software

Lease incentives received

Return of capital received from investment

Interest received 

net cash (outflow) inflow from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities 

Proceeds from borrowings net of transaction costs

Repayments of employee share loans

Proceeds from the issue of shares

Payment of costs of Initial Public Offering

Dividends paid

net cash (outflow) from financing activities

net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the financial period

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

The above consolidated statement of cash flows should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

2012 
52 weeks 
$’000

2011 
52 weeks 
$’000

Notes

 3,038,360 

 3,095,328 

 (2,805,122)

 (2,865,443)

 233,238 

 229,885 

 36,208 

 (32,169)

 (57,363)

 54,200 

 (38,190)

 (18,844)

32

 179,914

 227,051

 – 

 13,280 

 (48,715)

 (136,542)

 – 

 (40,374)

 (8,413)

 (10,189)

 2,696 

 16,750 

 – 

 1,462 

 (2,070)

 (7,633)

 – 

 6,109 

 4,404 

 2,176 

 (46,409)

 (160,650)

 (115)

 3 

 297 

 (7,502)

 (2,500)

 115 

 2,351 

 (3,946)

23

 (125,404)

 (130,981)

 (132,721)

 (134,961)

 784 

 37,274 

 38,058

 (68,560)

 105,834 

 37,274

8

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

6
5

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
notes to the financial statements
for the period ended 28 July 2012

Contents of the notes to the financial statements  

1.  Summary of significant accounting policies 

2.  Financial risk management 

3.  Critical accounting estimates and judgements 

4.  Segment information 

5.  Revenue and other income 

6.  Expenses 

7. 

Income tax expense 

8.  Current assets – Cash and cash equivalents 

9.  Current assets – Trade and other receivables 

10.  Current assets – Inventories 

11.  Derivative financial instruments 

12.  Non-current assets – Property, plant and equipment 

13.  Non-current assets – Deferred tax assets 

14.  Non-current assets – Intangible assets 

15.  Current liabilities – Trade and other payables 

16.  Current liabilities – Provisions 

17.  Borrowings 

18.  Non-current liabilities – Deferred tax liabilities 

19.  Non-current liabilities – Provisions 

20.  Non-current liabilities – Other 

21.  Contributed equity 

22.  Reserves and retained profits 

23.  Dividends 

24.  Key Management Personnel disclosures 

25.  Remuneration of auditors 

26.  Contingencies 

27.  Commitments 

28.  Related party transactions 

29.  Subsidiaries and transactions with non-controlling interests 

30.  Deed of cross guarantee 

31.  Events occurring after the reporting period 

32.  Reconciliation of profit after income tax to net cash inflow from operating activities 

33.  Parent entity financial information 

34.  Earnings per share 

35.  Share-based payments 

 67

 75

 80

 80

 81

 82

 83

 84

 84

 85

 86

 87

 88

 89

 90

 90

 91

 92

 93

 94

 94

 95

 97

 97

 100

 101

 101

 101

 102

 102

 104

 105

 105

 106

 107

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

6
6

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1.  Summary of significant accounting policies

The principal accounting policies adopted in the preparation of these 
consolidated financial statements are set out below. These policies 
have been consistently applied to all the periods presented, unless 
otherwise stated. The financial statements are for the consolidated 
entity consisting of Myer Holdings Limited and its subsidiaries.

(a) Basis of preparation
These general purpose financial statements have been prepared in 
accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and Interpretations 
issued by the Australian Accounting Standards Board and the 
Corporations Act 2001. Myer Holdings Limited is a for-profit entity  
for the purpose of preparing the financial statements.

Compliance with IFRSs
The consolidated financial statements of Myer Holdings Limited Group 
also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) 
as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB).

Early adoption of standards
The Group has not elected to apply any pronouncements before  
their operative date in the annual reporting period beginning  
31 July 2011.

Historical cost convention
These financial statements have been prepared under the historical 
cost convention, as modified by the revaluation of available for sale 
financial assets and financial assets and liabilities (including derivative 
instruments) at fair value through profit or loss.

Critical accounting estimates
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting 
standards requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates. It 
also requires management to exercise its judgement in the process  
of applying the Group’s accounting policies. The areas involving 
a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where 
assumptions and estimates are significant to the financial statements, 
are disclosed in note 3. 

(b) Principles of consolidation
(i) Subsidiaries
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the assets and 
liabilities of all subsidiaries of Myer Holdings Limited (‘’Company’’ or 
‘’parent entity’’) as at 28 July 2012 and the results of all subsidiaries 
for the period then ended. Myer Holdings Limited and its subsidiaries 
together are referred to in this financial report as the Group or the 
consolidated entity. 

Subsidiaries are all those entities (including special purpose entities) 
over which the Group has the power to govern the financial and 
operating policies, generally accompanying a shareholding of  
more than one half of the voting rights. The existence and effect  
of potential voting rights that are currently exercisable or convertible 
are considered when assessing whether the Company controls 
another entity. 

Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which control is 
transferred to the Group. They are deconsolidated from the date that 
control ceases.

The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for business 
combinations by the Group (refer note 1(h)).

Intercompany transactions, balances and unrealised gains on 
transactions between Group companies are eliminated. Unrealised 
losses are also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence 
of the impairment of the asset transferred. Accounting policies 
of subsidiaries have been changed where necessary to ensure 
consistency with the policies adopted by the Group. 

Non-controlling interests in the results and equity of subsidiaries are 
shown separately in the consolidated income statement, statement of 
comprehensive income, statement of changes in equity and balance 
sheet respectively.

(ii) Employee Share Trust
The Group has formed a trust to administer the Group’s employee 
share scheme. This trust is consolidated, as the substance of the 
relationship is that the trust is controlled by the Group.

Shares in Myer Holdings Limited held by the Myer Equity Plans Trust 
are disclosed as treasury shares and deducted from contributed equity.

(c) Segment reporting
Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the 
internal reporting provided to the chief operating decision maker. 
The chief operating decision maker, who is responsible for allocating 
resources and assessing performance of the operating segments, has 
been identified as the Chief Executive Officer.

(d) Foreign currency translation
(i) Functional and presentation currency
Items included in the financial statements of each of the Group’s entities 
are measured using the currency of the primary economic environment 
in which the entity operates (‘the functional currency’). The consolidated 
financial statements are presented in Australian dollars, which is Myer 
Holdings Limited’s functional and presentation currency. 

(ii) Transactions and balances
Foreign currency transactions are translated into the functional 
currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the dates of the 
transactions. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the 
settlement of such transactions and from the translation at year end 
exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in 
foreign currencies are recognised in profit or loss, except when they 
are deferred in equity as qualifying cash flow hedges and qualifying 
net investment hedges or are attributable to part of the  
net investment in a foreign operation. 

Foreign exchange gains and losses that relate to borrowings are 
presented in the income statement, within finance costs. All other 
foreign exchange gains and losses are presented in the income 
statement on a net basis within other income or other expenses. 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

6
7

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1.  Summary of significant accounting policies  continued

(d) Foreign currency translation  continued
Non-monetary items that are measured at fair value in a foreign 
currency are translated using the exchange rates at the date when 
the fair value was determined. Translation differences on assets and 
liabilities carried at fair value are reported as part of the fair value gain 
or loss. For example, translation differences on non-monetary assets 
and liabilities such as equities held at fair value through profit or loss 
are recognised in profit or loss as part of the fair value gain or loss 
and translation differences on non-monetary assets such as equities 
classified as available-for-sale financial assets are recognised in other 
comprehensive income. 

(iii) Group companies
The results and financial position of foreign operations (none of 
which has the currency of a hyperinflationary economy) that have 
a functional currency different from the presentation currency are 
translated into the presentation currency as follows: 

 ›

 ›

 ›

assets and liabilities for each balance sheet presented are translated 
at the closing rate at the date of that balance sheet;
income and expenses for each income statement and statement 
of comprehensive income are translated at average exchange rates 
(unless this is not a reasonable approximation of the cumulative 
effect of the rates prevailing on the transaction dates, in which 
case income and expenses are translated at the dates of the 
transactions); and
all resulting exchange differences are recognised in other 
comprehensive income.

On consolidation, exchange differences arising from the translation 
of any net investment in foreign entities, and of borrowings and other 
financial instruments designated as hedges of such investments, are 
recognised in other comprehensive income. When a foreign operation 
is sold or any borrowings forming part of the net investment are 
repaid, the associated exchange difference is reclassified to profit  
or loss, as part of the gain or loss on sale. 

Goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a 
foreign operation are treated as assets and liabilities of the foreign 
operation and translated at the closing rate. 

(e) Revenue recognition
Total sales value presented on the income statement represents 
proceeds from sale of goods from sales (both by Myer and concession 
operators) generated in Myer stores and prior to the deferral of 
revenue under the customer loyalty program. Concession sales 
presented in the income statement represents sales proceeds of 
concession operators within Myer stores. Total sales value is disclosed 
to show the total sales generated in Myer stores and provide a basis  
of comparison with similar department stores. 

Revenue from the sale of goods, excluding lay-by transactions, is 
recognised at the point of sale and is after deducting taxes paid, and 
does not include concession sales. Allowance is made for expected 
sales returns based on past experience of returns and expectations 
about the future. A provision for sales returns is recognised based on 
this assessment. Revenue from lay-by transactions is recognised as 
part of revenue from the sale of goods at the date upon which the 
customer satisfies all payment obligations and takes possession  
of the merchandise. 

Revenue from sale of goods excludes concession sales on the basis 
that the inventory sold is owned by the concession operator at 
the time of sale and not Myer. Myer’s share of concession sales is 
recognised as income within other operating revenue at the time  
the sale is made. 

Interest income is recognised on a time proportion basis using the 
effective interest method. Dividends are recognised as revenue when 
the right to receive payment is established. 

Customer loyalty program
The Group operates a loyalty program where customers accumulate 
points for purchases made which entitle them to discounts on future 
purchases. The award points are recognised as a separately identifiable 
component of the initial sale transaction, by allocating the fair value of 
the consideration received between the award points and the other 
components of the sale such that the award points are recognised at 
their fair value. Revenue from the award points is recognised when the 
points are redeemed. The amount of revenue is based on the number 
of points redeemed relative to the total number expected to be 
redeemed. Award points expire 24 months after the initial sale. 

(f) Income tax
The income tax expense or revenue for the period is the tax payable 
on the current period’s taxable income based on the national income 
tax rate adjusted by changes in deferred tax assets and liabilities 
attributable to temporary differences between the tax bases of assets 
and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the financial statements, 
and to unused tax losses. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised for temporary 
differences at the tax rates expected to apply when the assets are 
recovered or liabilities are settled, based on those tax rates which are 
enacted or substantively enacted. The relevant tax rates are applied 
to the cumulative amounts of deductible and taxable temporary 
differences to measure the deferred tax asset or liability. An exemption 
is made for certain temporary differences if they arose in a transaction, 
other than a business combination, that at the time of the transaction 
did not affect accounting profit or taxable profit or loss. 

Deferred tax assets are recognised for deductible temporary 
differences and unused tax losses only if it is probable that future 
taxable amounts will be available to utilise those temporary 
differences and losses. 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally 
enforceable right to offset current tax assets and liabilities and when 
the deferred tax balances relate to the same taxation authority. Current 
tax assets and tax liabilities are offset where the entity has a legally 
enforceable right to offset and intends either to settle on a net basis,  
or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. 

Current and deferred tax balances attributable to amounts recognised 
in other comprehensive income or directly in equity are also 
recognised directly in other comprehensive income or equity. 

(g) Leases
Leases of property, plant and equipment in which a significant portion 
of the risks and rewards of ownership are retained by the lessor are 
classified as operating leases (note 27). Lease incentives received on 
entering into operating leases are recognised as deferred income and 
are amortised over the lease term. Payments made under operating 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

8
6

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
leases (net of any amortised deferred income) are charged to the 
income statement on a straight line basis over the period of the lease.

Leases where the Group has substantially all the risks and rewards of 
ownership are classified as finance leases. There were no finance leases 
in place during the reporting period. 

(h) Business combinations
The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for all 
business combinations, regardless of whether equity instruments 
or other assets are acquired. The consideration transferred for the 
acquisition of a subsidiary comprises the fair values of the assets 
transferred, the liabilities incurred and the equity interests issued by 
the Group. The consideration transferred also includes the fair value 
of any asset or liability resulting from a contingent consideration 
arrangement and the fair value of any pre-existing equity interest  
in the subsidiary. Acquisition-related costs are expensed as incurred. 
Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities and contingent liabilities 
assumed in a business combination are, with limited exceptions, 
measured initially at their fair values at the acquisition date. On an 
acquisition-by-acquisition basis, the Group recognises any non-
controlling interest in the acquiree either at fair value or at the 
non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquiree’s net 
identifiable assets. 

The excess of the consideration transferred and the amount of any 
non-controlling interest in the acquiree over the fair value of the net 
identifiable assets acquired is recorded as goodwill. If those amounts 
are less than the fair value of the net identifiable assets of the subsidiary 
acquired and the measurement of all amounts has been reviewed, the 
difference is recognised directly in profit or loss as a bargain purchase. 

Where settlement of any part of cash consideration is deferred, 
the amounts payable in the future are discounted to their present 
value as at the date of exchange. The discount rate used is the 
entity’s incremental borrowing rate, being the rate at which a similar 
borrowing could be obtained from an independent financier under 
comparable terms and conditions. 

Contingent consideration is classified either as equity or a financial 
liability. Amounts classified as a financial liability are subsequently 
remeasured to fair value with changes in fair value recognised in profit 
or loss. 

(i) Impairment of assets
Goodwill and intangible assets that have an indefinite useful life are 
not subject to amortisation and are tested annually for impairment, or 
more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that 
they might be impaired. Other assets are reviewed for impairment 
whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the 
carrying amount may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is 
recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount 
exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the 
higher of an asset’s fair value less costs to sell and value in use. For the 
purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest 
levels for which there are separately identifiable cash inflows which are 
largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups  
of assets (cash generating units). For store assets, the appropriate cash-
generating unit is an individual store. Non-financial assets other than 
goodwill that have previously suffered an impairment are reviewed for 
possible reversal of the impairment at each reporting date. 

(j) Cash and cash equivalents
For the purpose of presentation in the statement of cash flows, cash 
and cash equivalents includes cash on hand, deposits held at call with 
financial institutions, other short-term, highly liquid investments with 
original maturities of three months or less that are readily convertible 
to known amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant 
risk of changes in value, and bank overdrafts. 

(k) Trade receivables
Collectibility of trade receivables is reviewed on an ongoing basis. 
Debts which are known to be uncollectible are written off by reducing 
the carrying amount directly. An allowance account (provision for 
impairment of trade receivables) is established when there is objective 
evidence that the Group will not be able to collect all amounts due 
according to the original terms of receivables. Cash flows relating to 
short-term receivables are not discounted if the effect of discounting  
is immaterial.

The amount of the impairment loss is recognised in the income 
statement within other expenses. When a trade receivable for which 
an impairment allowance had been recognised becomes uncollectible 
in a subsequent period, it is written off against the allowance account. 
Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited 
against other expenses in the income statement. 

(l) Inventories
At the end of the reporting period, all inventories are valued at the 
lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is determined using 
the weighted average cost method, after deducting any purchase 
settlement discount and including logistics expenses incurred in 
bringing the inventories to their present location and condition. 

Volume related supplier rebates and supplier promotional rebates  
are recognised as a reduction in the cost of inventory and are recorded 
as a reduction of cost of goods sold when the inventory is sold. 

(m) Investments and other financial assets
Classification
The Group classifies its investments in the following categories: 
financial assets at fair value through profit or loss, loans and 
receivables, held to maturity investments, and available for sale 
financial assets. The classification depends on the purpose for which 
the investments were acquired. Management determines the 
classification of its investments at initial recognition and, in the case  
of assets classified as held to maturity, re-evaluates this designation  
at the end of each reporting period. 

(i) Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are financial assets 
held for trading which are acquired principally for the purpose 
of selling in the short-term with the intention of making a profit. 
Derivatives are also categorised as held for trading unless they are 
designated as hedges. 

(ii) Loans and receivables
Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or 
determinable payments that are not quoted in an active market. They 
arise when the Group provides money, goods or services directly to a 
debtor with no intention of selling the receivable. They are included in 
current assets, except for those with maturities greater than 12 months 
after the reporting period which are classified as non-current assets. 
Loans and receivables are included in receivables in the balance sheet 
(note 9). 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

6
9

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1.  Summary of significant accounting policies  continued

(m) Investments and other financial assets  continued
(iii) Held to maturity investments
Held to maturity investments are non-derivative financial assets  
with fixed or determinable payments and fixed maturities that the 
Group’s management has the positive intention and ability to hold  
to maturity. 

(iv) Available for sale financial assets
Available for sale financial assets are non-derivatives that are 
either designated in this category or not classified in any of the 
other categories. They are included in non-current assets unless 
management intends to dispose of the investment within  
12 months of the end of the reporting period. 

Recognition and derecognition
Purchases and sales of investments are recognised on trade-date, 
the date on which the Group commits to purchase or sell the asset. 
Investments are initially recognised at fair value plus transaction costs 
for all financial assets not carried at fair value through profit or loss. 
Financial assets carried at fair value through profit or loss are initially 
recognised at fair value and transaction costs are expensed in profit or 
loss. Financial assets are derecognised when the rights to receive cash 
flows from the financial assets have expired or have been transferred 
and the Group has transferred substantially all the risks and rewards  
of ownership. 

Measurement
Available for sale financial assets and financial assets at fair value 
through profit or loss are subsequently carried at fair value, unless  
they are equity securities that do not have a market price quoted  
in an active market and whose fair value cannot be reliably measured.  
In that case they are carried at cost. 

Loans and receivables and held to maturity investments are carried 
at amortised cost using the effective interest method. Gains or losses 
arising from changes in the fair value of the ‘financial assets at fair 
value through profit or loss’ category, including interest and dividend 
income, are presented in profit or loss within other income or other 
expenses in the period in which they arise. 

Changes in the fair value of monetary securities denominated in 
a foreign currency and classified as available for sale are analysed 
between translation differences resulting from changes in amortised 
cost of the security and other changes in the carrying amount of the 
security. The translation differences are recognised in profit or loss and 
other changes in carrying amount are recognised in equity. Changes 
in the fair value of other monetary and non-monetary securities 
classified as available for sale are recognised in equity. 

When securities classified as available for sale are sold or impaired, the 
accumulated fair value adjustments recognised in equity are included 
in profit or loss as gains and losses from investment securities. 

Details on how the fair value of financial instruments is determined  
are disclosed in note 2. 

assets, the cumulative loss – measured as the difference between 
the acquisition cost and the current fair value, less any impairment 
loss on that financial asset previously recognised in profit or loss 
– is reclassified from equity and recognised in profit or loss as a 
reclassification adjustment. Impairment losses recognised in profit 
or loss on equity instruments classified as available for sale are not 
reversed through profit or loss. 

(n) Derivatives and hedging activities
Derivatives are initially recognised at fair value on the date a derivative 
contract is entered into and are subsequently remeasured to their 
fair value at the end of each reporting period. The accounting for 
subsequent changes in fair value depends on whether the derivative 
is designated as a hedging instrument, and if so, the nature of the item 
being hedged. The Group designates certain derivatives as either: 

 › hedges of the fair value of recognised assets or liabilities  

or a firm commitment (fair value hedges); or

 › hedges of the cash flows or recognised assets or liabilities and 
highly probable forecast transactions (cash flow hedges).

The Group documents at the inception of the hedging transaction the 
relationship between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well 
as its risk management objective and strategy for undertaking various 
hedge transactions. The Group also documents its assessments, 
both at hedge inception and on an ongoing basis, of whether the 
derivatives that are used in hedging transactions have been and will 
continue to be highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values or 
cash flows of hedged items. 

The full fair value of a hedging derivative is classified as a non-current 
asset or liability when the remaining maturity of the hedged item is 
more than 12 months. It is classified as a current asset or liability when 
the remaining maturity of the hedged item is less than 12 months.

(i) Fair value hedge
Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify 
as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together 
with any changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability 
that are attributable to the hedged risk. The gain or loss relating 
to the effective portion of interest rate swaps hedging fixed rate 
borrowings is recognised in profit or loss within finance costs, together 
with changes in the fair value of the hedged fixed rate borrowings 
attributable to interest rate risk. The gain or loss relating to the 
ineffective portion is recognised in profit or loss. 

If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, the 
adjustment to the carrying amount of a hedge item for which the 
effective interest method is used is amortised to profit or loss over  
the period to maturity using a recalculated effective interest rate.

(ii) Cash flow hedge
The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are 
designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is recognised in equity in 
the hedging reserve. The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion 
is recognised immediately in profit or loss. 

Impairment
The Group assesses at the end of each reporting period whether there 
is objective evidence that a financial asset or Group of financial assets 
is impaired. In the case of equity securities classified as available for 
sale, a significant or prolonged decline in the fair value of a security 
below its cost is considered in determining whether the security is 
impaired. If any such evidence exists for available for sale financial 

Amounts accumulated in equity are reclassified to profit or loss in 
the periods when the hedged item affects profit or loss. The gain 
or loss relating to the effective portion of the interest rate swaps 
hedging variable rate borrowings is recognised in profit or loss within 
finance costs. When the forecast transaction that is hedged results 
in the recognition of a non-financial asset (for example, inventory or 
fixed assets) the gains and losses previously deferred in equity are 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

0
7

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
transferred from equity and included in the initial measurement of 
the cost of the asset. The deferred amounts are ultimately recognised 
in profit or loss as cost of goods sold in the case of inventory, or as 
depreciation in the case of fixed assets. 

When a hedging instrument expires or is sold or terminated, or 
when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, 
any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time remains in 
equity and is recognised when the forecast transaction is ultimately 
recognised in profit or loss. When a forecast transaction is no longer 
expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was reported in 
equity is immediately reclassified to profit or loss. 

(iii) Derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting
Certain derivative instruments do not qualify for hedge accounting. 
Changes in the fair value of any derivative instrument that does not 
qualify for hedge accounting are recognised immediately in profit  
or loss. 

(o) Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost less depreciation. Cost 
includes expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquisition of 
the items. Cost may also include transfers from equity of any gains/
losses on qualifying cash flow hedges of foreign currency purchases  
of property, plant and equipment. 

Subsequent costs are included in the asset’s carrying amount or 
recognised as a separate asset, as appropriate, only when it is probable 
that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to 
the Group and the cost of the item can be measured reliably. All other 
repairs and maintenance are charged to profit or loss during the 
financial period in which they are incurred. 

Land is not depreciated. Depreciation on other assets is calculated 
using the straight line method to allocate their cost net of their 
residual values, over their estimated useful lives, as follows: 

 ›
 ›
 ›
 ›

Buildings 
Fixtures and fittings 
Plant and equipment 
Leasehold improvements 

40 years
3 – 12.5 years
10 – 20 years
20 years

The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted  
if appropriate, at the end of each reporting period. 

An asset’s carrying amount is written down immediately to its 
recoverable amount if the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its 
estimated recoverable amount (note 1(i)). 

Gains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing proceeds 
with carrying amount. These are included in profit or loss. 

Non-current assets held for sale
Non-current assets are classified as held for sale and stated at the 
lower of their carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell if 
their carrying amount will be recovered principally through a sale 
transaction rather than through continuing use. 

Non-current assets are not depreciated or amortised while they are 
classified as held for sale. Non-current assets classified as held for sale 
are presented separately from the other assets in the balance sheet. 

(p) Intangible assets
(i) Goodwill
Goodwill is measured as described in note 1(h). Goodwill on 
acquisition of subsidiaries is included in intangible assets. Goodwill 
is not amortised but it is tested for impairment annually, or more 
frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that it might 
be impaired, and is carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses. 
Gains and losses on the disposal of an entity include the carrying 
amount of goodwill relating to the entity sold. 

(ii) Brand names and trademarks
Certain Group brands are considered to have indefinite lives. These 
brands are not considered to have foreseeable brand maturity dates, 
and have accordingly been assessed as having indefinite useful lives 
and are therefore not amortised. Instead, the brand names are tested 
for impairment annually, or more frequently if events or changes in 
circumstances indicate that they might be impaired, and are carried at 
cost less accumulated impairment losses. 

Other brands have a finite useful life and are carried at cost less 
accumulated amortisation and impairment losses. Amortisation is 
calculated using the straight line method to allocate the cost of brands 
over their estimated useful life of 20 years. 

(iii) Computer software
All costs directly incurred in the purchase or development of 
major computer software or subsequent upgrades and material 
enhancements, which can be reliably measured and are not integral 
to a related asset, are capitalised as intangible assets. Direct costs may 
include internal payroll and on-costs for employees directly associated 
with the project. Costs incurred on computer software maintenance 
or during the planning phase are expensed as incurred. Computer 
software is amortised over the period of time during which the 
benefits are expected to arise, being 5 to 10 years. 

(iv) Lease rights
Lease rights represent the amount paid up-front to take over store site 
leases from the existing lessee where such payments are in addition 
to the ongoing payment of normal market lease rentals. Lease rights 
are amortised over the term of the lease plus any renewal options 
reasonably certain to be utilised at the time of acquisition of the lease 
rights, being 13 to 17 years. 

(q) Trade and other payables
These amounts represent liabilities for goods and services provided 
to the Group prior to the end of financial period which are unpaid. 
The amounts are unsecured and are usually paid within 30 to 90 days 
of recognition. Trade and other payables are presented as current 
liabilities unless payment is not due within 12 months from the 
reporting date. 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

7
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1.  Summary of significant accounting policies  continued

(r) Borrowings
Borrowings are initially recognised at fair value, net of transaction costs 
incurred. Borrowings are subsequently measured at amortised cost. 
Any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and 
the redemption amount is recognised in profit or loss over the period 
of the borrowings using the effective interest method. Fees paid 
on the establishment of loan facilities are recognised as transaction 
costs of the loan to the extent that it is probable that some or all of 
the facility will be drawn down. In this case, the fee is deferred until 
the draw down occurs. To the extent there is no evidence that it is 
probable that some or all of the facility will be drawn down, the fee is 
capitalised as a prepayment for liquidity services and amortised over 
the period of the facility to which it relates. 

Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Group has 
an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least 
12 months after the reporting period. 

(s) Borrowing costs
Borrowing costs incurred for the construction of any qualifying asset 
are capitalised during the period of time that is required to complete 
and prepare the asset for its intended use or sale. Other borrowing 
costs are expensed. 

(t) Provisions
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present legal or 
constructive obligation as a result of past events, it is probable that an 
outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation and the 
amount has been reliably estimated. Provisions are not recognised for 
future operating losses. 

Where there are a number of similar obligations, the likelihood that an 
outflow will be required in settlement is determined by considering 
the class of obligations as a whole. A provision is recognised even if 
the likelihood of an outflow with respect to any one item included in 
the same class of obligations may be small. 

Provisions are measured at the present value of management’s best 
estimate of the expenditure required to settle the present obligation  
at the end of the reporting period. The discount rate used to 
determine the present value reflects current market assessments  
of the time value of money and the risks specific to the liability. 

The Group is self-insured for costs relating to workers’ compensation 
and general liability claims in certain states. Provisions are recognised 
based on claims reported, and an estimate of claims incurred but not 
yet reported, prior to balance date. These provisions are determined 
utilising an actuarially determined method, which is based on various 
assumptions including but not limited to future inflation, average 
claim size and claim administrative expenses. These assumptions are 
reviewed annually and any reassessment of these assumptions will 
affect the workers’ compensation expense. 

(u) Employee benefits
(i) Short-term obligations
Liabilities for wages and salaries, including non-monetary benefits 
and annual leave expected to be settled within 12 months after the 
end of the period in which the employees render the related service 

are recognised in respect of employees’ services up to the end of the 
reporting period and are measured at the amounts expected to be 
paid when the liabilities are settled. The liability for annual leave is 
recognised in the provision for employee benefits. All other short-term 
employee benefit obligations are presented as payables. 

(ii) Other long-term employee benefit obligations
The liability for long service leave which is not expected to be settled 
within 12 months after the end of the period in which the employees 
render the related service is recognised in the provision for employee 
benefits and measured as the present value of expected future 
payments to be made in respect of services provided by employees 
up to the end of the reporting period using the projected unit credit 
method. Consideration is given to expected future wage and salary 
levels, experience of employee departures and periods of service. 
Expected future payments are discounted using market yields at the 
end of the reporting period on national government bonds with 
terms to maturity and currency that match, as closely as possible, the 
estimated future cash outflows. 

The obligations are presented as current liabilities in the balance sheet 
if the entity does not have an unconditional right to defer settlement 
for at least 12 months after the reporting date, regardless of when the 
actual settlement is expected to occur. 

(iii) Retirement benefit obligations
The Group contributes to a number of superannuation funds that have 
been established to provide benefits for employees. Apart from one 
defined benefit fund, with a range of member categories, all funds are 
defined contribution funds, and contributions to them are recognised 
as an expense as they become payable. 

The defined benefit fund that the Group contributes to is currently 
administered through Mercer Human Resource Consulting within 
a Mercer Master Trust arrangement on behalf of Myer. The defined 
benefit fund provides defined lump sum pension benefits based 
on years of service and final average salary. Myer defined benefit 
members who were members of the Coles Myer Defined Benefit Fund 
were transferred to the Myer Fund effective 2 June 2006. The fund is 
closed to new members and only existing Defined Benefit members 
were eligible for membership. 

A liability or asset in respect of the defined benefit fund is recognised 
in the balance sheet, and is measured as the present value of the 
defined benefit obligation at the end of the reporting period less 
the fair value of the fund’s assets at that date and any unrecognised 
past service cost. The present value of the defined benefit obligation 
is based on expected future payments that arise from membership 
of the fund to the end of the reporting period, calculated annually 
by independent actuaries using the projected unit credit method. 
Consideration is given to expected future wage and salary levels, 
experience of employee departures and periods of service. 

Expected future payments are discounted using market yields at the 
end of the reporting period on government bonds with terms to 
maturity and currency that match, as closely as possible, the estimated 
future cash outflows. 

Actuarial gains and losses arising from experience adjustments and 
changes in actuarial assumptions are recognised in the period in 
which they occur, outside profit or loss directly in the statement  
of comprehensive income. 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

2
7

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(iv) Profit sharing and bonus plans
The Group recognises a liability and an expense for bonuses and profit 
sharing based on a formula that takes into consideration the profit 
attributable to the Group’s shareholders after certain adjustments. The 
Group recognises a provision where contractually obliged or where 
there is a past practice that has created a constructive obligation. 

(v) Termination benefits
Termination benefits are payable when employment is terminated 
before the normal retirement date, or when an employee accepts 
voluntary redundancy in exchange for these benefits. The Group 
recognises termination benefits when it is demonstrably committed to 
either terminating the employment of current employees according 
to a detailed formal plan without possibility of withdrawal or providing 
termination benefits as a result of an offer made to encourage 
voluntary redundancy. Benefits falling due more than 12 months after 
the end of the reporting period are discounted to present value. 

(vi) Share-based payments
Share-based compensation benefits are provided to employees via the 
Myer Equity Incentive Plan. Information relating to these schemes is 
set out in note 35. 

The fair value of options granted under the plan is recognised as an 
employee benefit expense with a corresponding increase in equity. 
The total amount to be expensed is determined by reference to 
the fair value of the options granted, which includes any market 
performance conditions but excludes the impact of any services and 
non-market performance vesting conditions and the impact of any 
non-vesting conditions. 

Non-market vesting conditions are included in assumptions about 
the number of options that are expected to vest. The total expense is 
recognised over the vesting period, which is the period over which all 
the specified vesting conditions are to be satisfied. At the end of each 
period, the entity revises its estimates of the number of options that 
are expected to vest based on the non-market vesting conditions. It 
recognises the impact of revisions to original estimates, if any, in profit 
or loss, with a corresponding adjustment to equity. 

The Myer Equity Incentive Plan is administered by the Myer Equity 
Incentive Plan Trust see note 1(b)(ii). When options are exercised, the 
trust transfers the appropriate number of shares to the employee. The 
proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs are 
credited directly to equity. 

(v) Contributed equity
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly 
attributable to the issue of new shares are shown in equity as a 
deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds. 

Where any Group company purchases the Company’s equity 
instruments, for example as the result of a share buy-back or a share-
based payment plan, the consideration paid, including any directly 
attributable incremental costs (net of income taxes) is deducted from 
equity attributable to the owners of Myer Holdings Limited as treasury 
shares until the shares are cancelled or reissued. Where such ordinary 
shares are subsequently reissued, any consideration received, net of 
any directly attributable incremental transaction costs and the related 
income tax effects, is included in equity attributable to the owners of 
Myer Holdings Limited. 

(w) Dividends
Provision is made for the amount of any dividend declared, being 
appropriately authorised and no longer at the discretion of the entity, 
on or before the end of the financial period but not distributed at 
balance date. 

(x) Earnings per share
(i) Basic earnings per share
Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing: 
 ›

the profit attributable to owners of the Company, excluding any 
costs of servicing equity other than ordinary shares

 › by the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding 

during the financial period, adjusted for bonus elements in 
ordinary shares issued during the period and excluding treasury 
shares (note 21).

(ii) Diluted earnings per share
Diluted earnings per share adjusts the figures used in the 
determination of basic earnings per share to take into account: 
 ›

the after income tax effect of interest and other financing costs 
associated with dilutive potential ordinary shares; and
the weighted average number of additional ordinary shares that 
would have been outstanding assuming the conversion of all 
dilutive potential ordinary shares.

 ›

(y) Goods and Services Tax (GST)
Revenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of 
associated GST, unless the GST incurred is not recoverable from the 
taxation authority. In this case it is recognised as part of the cost of 
acquisition of the asset or as part of the expense. 

Receivables and payables are stated inclusive of the amount of GST 
receivable or payable. The net amount of GST recoverable from, or 
payable to, the taxation authority is included with other receivables or 
payables in the balance sheet. 

Cash flows are presented on a gross basis. The GST components of 
cash flows arising from investing or financing activities, which are 
recoverable from, or payable to the taxation authority, are presented  
as operating cash flow. 

(z) Rounding of amounts
The Group has taken advantage of Class Order 98/100, issued by the 
Australian Securities and Investments Commission, relating to the 
‘’rounding off’’ of amounts in the financial statements. Amounts in the 
financial statements have been rounded off to the nearest thousand 
dollars, or in certain cases, to the nearest dollar. 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

7
3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1.  Summary of significant accounting policies  continued

(aa) New accounting standards and interpretations
Certain new accounting standards and interpretations have been 
published that are not mandatory for 28 July 2012 reporting periods. 
The Group’s and the parent entity’s assessment of the impact of these 
new standards and interpretations, that were considered relevant for 
the consolidated entity, is set out below. 

(i) AASB 9 Financial Instruments 2009-11 Amendments to Australian 
Accounting Standards arising from AASB 9 and AASB 2010-7 
Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards arising from AASB 9 
(December 2010) (effective from 1 January 2013)
AASB 9 Financial Instruments addresses the classification, measurement 
and derecognition of financial assets and financial liabilities. The 
standard is not applicable until 1 January 2015 but is available for  
early adoption. When adopted, the standard will affect in particular 
the Group’s accounting for its available for sale financial assets, since 
AASB 9 only permits the recognition of fair value gains and losses in 
other comprehensive income if they relate to equity investments that 
are not held for trading. Fair value gains and losses on available for sale 
debt investments, for example, will therefore have to be recognised 
directly in profit or loss. 

There will be no impact on the Group’s accounting for financial 
liabilities, as the new requirements only affect the accounting for 
financial liabilities that are designated at fair value through profit or loss 
and the Group does not have any such liabilities. The derecognition 
rules have been transferred from AASB 139 Financial Instruments: 
Recognition and Measurement and have not been changed. 

(ii) AASB 10 Consolidated Financial Statements, AASB 11 Joint 
Arrangements, AASB 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities,  
revised AASB 127 Separate Financial Statements and AASB 128 
Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures and AASB 2011-7 
Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards arising from  
the Consolidation and Joint Arrangements Standards (effective  
1 January 2013)
In August 2011, the AASB issued a suite of five new and amended 
standards which address the accounting for joint arrangements, 
consolidated financial statements and associated disclosures. 

AASB 10 replaces all of the guidance on control and consolidation 
in AASB 127 Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements, and 
Interpretation 12 Consolidation – Special Purpose Entities. The core 
principle that a consolidated entity presents a parent and its 
subsidiaries as if they are a single economic entity remains unchanged, 
as do the mechanics of consolidation. However, the standard 
introduces a single definition of control that applies to all entities.  
It focuses on the need to have both power and rights or exposure 
to variable returns. Power is the current ability to direct the activities 
that significantly influence returns. Returns must vary and can be 
positive, negative or both. Control exists when the investor can use its 
power to affect the amount of its returns. There is also new guidance 
on participating and protective rights and on agent/principal 
relationships. While the Group does not expect the new standard 
to have a significant impact on its composition, it has yet to perform 
a detailed analysis of the new guidance in the context of its various 
investees that may or may not be controlled under the new rules.

AASB 11 introduces a principles-based approach to accounting for 
joint arrangements. The focus is no longer on the legal structure 
of joint arrangements, but rather on how rights and obligations 
are shared by the parties to the joint arrangement. Based on the 

assessment of rights and obligations, a joint arrangement will be 
classified as either a joint operation or a joint venture. Joint ventures 
are accounted for using the equity method, and the choice to 
proportionately consolidate will no longer be permitted. Parties to a 
joint operation will account their share of revenues, expenses, assets 
and liabilities in much the same way as under the previous standard. 
AASB 11 also provides guidance for parties that participate in joint 
arrangements but do not share joint control. The Group does not have 
any joint ventures. 

AASB 12 sets out the required disclosures for entities reporting under 
the two new standards, AASB 10 and AASB 11, and replaces the 
disclosure requirements currently found in AASB 127 and AASB 128. 
Application of this standard by the Group will not affect any of the 
amounts recognised in the financial statements, but will impact the 
type of information disclosed in relation to the Group’s investments. 

Amendments to AASB 128 provide clarification that an entity 
continues to apply the equity method and does not remeasure its 
retained interest as part of ownership changes where a joint venture 
becomes an associate, and vice versa. The amendments also introduce 
a “partial disposal” concept. The Group does not expect these 
amendments to make a material impact. 

The Group does not expect to adopt the new standards before their 
operative date. They would therefore be first applied in the financial 
statements for the annual reporting period ending 30 June 2014. 

(iii) AASB 13 Fair Value Measurement and AASB 2011-8 Amendments 
to Australian Accounting Standards arising from AASB 13 (effective  
1 January 2013)
AASB 13 was released in September 2011. It explains how to measure 
fair value and aims to enhance fair value disclosures. The Group has 
yet to determine which, if any, of its current measurement techniques 
will have to change as a result of the new guidance. It is therefore 
not possible to state the impact, if any, of the new rules on any of the 
amounts recognised in the financial statements. However, application 
of the new standard will impact the type of information disclosed in the 
notes to the financial statements. The Group does not intend to adopt 
the new standard before its operative date, which means that it would 
be first applied in the annual reporting period ending 30 June 2014. 

(iv) Revised AASB 119 Employee Benefits, AASB 2011-10  
Amendments to Australian Accounting Standards arising from  
AASB 119 (September 2011) and AASB 2011-11 Amendments  
to AASB 119 (September 2011) arising from Reduced Disclosure 
Requirements (effective 1 January 2013)
In September 2011, the AASB released a revised standard on 
accounting for employee benefits. It requires the recognition of all 
remeasurements of defined benefit liabilities/assets immediately 
in other comprehensive income (removal of the so-called ‘corridor’ 
method) and the calculation of a net interest expense or income by 
applying the discount rate to the net defined benefit liability or asset. 
This replaces the expected return on plan assets that is currently 
included in profit or loss. The standard also introduces a number of 
additional disclosures for defined benefit liabilities/assets and could 
affect the timing of the recognition of termination benefits. The 
amendments will have to be implemented retrospectively. The Group 
does not expect these amendments to make a material impact. 

There are no other standards that are not yet effective and that are 
expected to have a material impact on the entity in the current or 
future reporting periods and on foreseeable future transactions. 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

4
7

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(ab) Parent entity financial information
The financial information for the parent entity, Myer Holdings Limited, 
disclosed in note 33 has been prepared on the same basis as the 
consolidated financial statements, except as set out below. 

(i) Investments in subsidiaries
Investment in subsidiaries are accounted for at cost in the financial 
statements of Myer Holdings Limited. 

(ii) Tax consolidation legislation
Myer Holdings Limited and its wholly owned Australian controlled 
entities have implemented the tax consolidation legislation. 

The head entity, Myer Holdings Limited, and the controlled entities in 
the tax consolidated Group continue to account for their own current 
and deferred tax amounts. These tax amounts are measured as if each 
entity in the tax consolidated Group continues to be a stand-alone 
taxpayer in its own right. 

In addition to its own current and deferred tax amounts, Myer Holdings 
Limited also recognises the current tax liabilities (or assets) and the 
deferred tax assets arising from unused tax losses and unused tax 
credits assumed from controlled entities in the tax consolidated Group.

The entities have also entered into a tax funding agreement under which 
the wholly-owned entities fully compensate Myer Holdings Limited 
for any current tax payable assumed and are compensated by Myer 
Holdings Limited for any current tax receivable and deferred tax assets 
relating to unused tax losses or unused tax credits that are transferred 
to Myer Holdings Limited under the tax consolidation legislation. 
The funding amounts are determined by reference to the amounts 
recognised in the wholly-owned entities’ financial statements. 

The funding amounts are recognised as current intercompany 
receivables or payables. 

Assets or liabilities arising under tax funding agreements with the tax 
consolidated entities are recognised as amounts receivable from or 
payable to other entities in the Group. 

Any difference between the amounts assumed and amounts 
receivable or payable under the tax funding agreement are recognised 
as a contribution to (or distribution from) wholly-owned tax 
consolidated entities. 

(ac) Comparative amounts
Where current period balances have been classified differently within 
current period disclosures when compared to the prior period, 
comparative disclosures have been restated to ensure consistency  
of presentation between periods. 

2.  Financial risk management

The Group’s activities expose it to a variety of financial risks; market 
risk (including currency risk and cash flow and fair value interest rate 
risk), credit risk and liquidity risk. The Group’s overall risk management 
program focuses on the unpredictability of financial markets and seeks 
to minimise potential adverse effects on the financial performance 
of the Group. The Group uses derivative financial instruments such as 
foreign exchange contracts and interest rate swaps to hedge certain 
risk exposures. Derivatives are exclusively used for hedging purposes, 
i.e. not as trading or other speculative instruments. The Group uses 
different methods to measure different types of risk to which it is 
exposed. These methods include sensitivity analysis in the case of 
interest rate and foreign exchange risk, and an aging analysis for  
credit risk. 

Risk management is carried out by the Company under policies 
approved by the Board of Directors. The Company identifies, evaluates 
and hedges financial risks. The Board provides written principles for 
overall risk management, as well as policies covering specific areas, 
such as foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, and use of financial 
instruments and non-derivative financial instruments. 

(a) Market risk
(i) Foreign exchange risk
Foreign exchange risk arises when future commercial transactions 
and recognised assets and liabilities are denominated in a currency 
that is not the entity’s functional currency. 

The Group sources inventory purchases overseas and is exposed to 
foreign exchange risk, particularly in relation to currency exposures to 
the US dollar. 

To minimise the effects of a volatile and unpredictable exchange 
rate Group policy is to enter into forward exchange contracts in 
relation to the Group’s overseas purchases for any 12-month period. 
The actual level of cover taken fluctuates depending on the period 
until settlement of the foreign currency transaction, within the 
board approved hedging policy. This policy allows cover to be taken 
on a sliding scale between 25 – 100% depending on the period to 
maturity (up to 12 months). 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

7
5

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2.  Financial risk management  continued

(a) Market risk  continued
The Group’s exposure to foreign currency risk at the end of the reporting period was as follows: 

Trade payables

Forward exchange contracts

28 July 2012

30 July 2011

USD 
$’000

 11,987 

 113,550 

EURO 
$’000

 350 

 – 

GBP 
$’000

 15 

 – 

USD 
$’000

 13,208 

 76,350 

EURO 
$’000

 264 

 – 

HKD 
$’000

 82 

 – 

The parent entity’s financial assets and liabilities are denominated in Australian dollars. 

Group sensitivity
Based on the financial instruments held at 28 July 2012, had the Australian dollar weakened/strengthened by 10% against the US dollar  
with all other variables held constant, the Group’s post-tax profit for the period would have been $0.7 million higher/$0.9 million lower  
(2011: $0.7 million higher/$0.9 million lower), mainly as a result of foreign exchange gains/losses on translation of US dollar denominated 
financial instruments as detailed in the above table. 

Other components of equity would have been $6.4 million higher/$7.0 million lower (2011: $3.6 million higher/$3.4 million lower) had the 
Australian dollar weakened/strengthened by 10% against the US dollar, arising from foreign exchange contracts designated as cash flow hedges. 
The Group’s exposure to other foreign exchange movements is not material.

These sensitivities were calculated based on the Group’s period end spot rate for the applicable reporting period.

(ii) Cash flow and fair value interest rate risk
The Group is exposed to interest rate risk as it borrows funds at floating interest rates. Borrowings issued at floating rates expose the Group to 
cash flow interest rate risk. The risks are managed by the use of floating to fixed interest rate swap contracts. During the period, the Group policy 
was to fix the rates between 0 to 30% of its Term Debt Facility. This policy had been complied with at the period end.

Interest rate swaps have the economic effect of converting borrowings from floating rates to fixed rates. Generally, the Group raises long-term 
borrowings at floating rates and swaps them into fixed rates that are lower than those available if the Group borrowed at fixed rates directly. 
Under the interest rate swaps, the Group agrees with other parties to exchange, at specified intervals (mainly quarterly), the difference between 
fixed contract rates and floating rate interest amounts calculated by reference to the agreed notional principal amounts.

As at the end of the reporting period, the Group had the following variable rate borrowings and interest rate swap contracts outstanding:

Borrowings – Variable

Interest rate swaps (notional principal amount)

Net exposure to cash flow interest rate risk

28 July 2012

30 July 2011

Weighted 
average  
interest rate 
%

5.2%

5.6%

Weighted 
average  
interest rate 
%

6.7%

6.2%

Balance  
$’000

 421,193 

 (100,000)

321,193

Balance 
$’000

 419,591 

 (80,000)

339,591

The weighted average interest rates noted above for both borrowings and swaps are inclusive of margins applicable to the underlying variable 
rate borrowings.

An analysis by maturities is provided in (c) below.

Interest rate exposure is evaluated regularly to confirm alignment with Group policy and to ensure the Group is not exposed to excess risk from 
interest rate volatility.

At 28 July 2012, if interest rates had changed by +/ – 10% from the period end rates with all other variables held constant, post-tax profit for  
the period would have been $0.8 million higher/$0.8 million lower (2011: change of +/ – 10%: $1.2 million higher/$1.2 million lower), mainly  
as a result of higher/lower interest expense on borrowings.

Other components of equity would have been $0.6 million lower/$0.6 million higher (2011: $0.3 million lower/$0.3 million higher) mainly as a 
result of an increase/decrease in the fair value of the cash flow hedges of borrowings.

The range of sensitivities have been assumed based on the Group’s experience of average interest rate fluctuations in the applicable  
reporting period.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

6
7

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(b) Credit risk
Credit risk is managed on a Group basis. Credit risk arises from cash and cash equivalents, derivative financial instruments and deposits with 
banks and financial institutions, as well as credit exposures to customers, including receivables and committed transactions. For banks and 
financial institutions, only independently rated parties with a minimum rating of ‘A’ are accepted. Sales to retail customers are primarily required 
to be settled in cash or using major credit cards, mitigating credit risk. Where transactions are settled by way of lay-by arrangements, revenue is 
not recognised until full payment has been received from the customer and goods collected.

The maximum exposure to credit risk at the end of the reporting period is the carrying amount of the financial assets as disclosed in notes 8, 9, and 11.

The credit quality of financial assets that are neither past due nor impaired can be assessed by reference to external credit ratings as detailed 
below, historical information about receivables default rates and current trading levels.

Based on the credit history of these classes, it is expected that these amounts will be received and are not impaired. 

Cash at bank and short-term bank deposits
AAA
AA
A

Derivative financial assets
AAA
AA
A

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

 – 
 38,058 
 – 

 38,058 

 – 
 – 
 – 

 – 

 – 
 37,274 
 – 

 37,274 

 – 
 258 
 – 

 258 

(c) Liquidity risk
Prudent liquidity risk management implies maintaining sufficient cash and marketable securities and the availability of funding through an 
adequate amount of committed credit facilities to meet obligations when due and due to close out market positions. Due to the seasonal nature 
of the retail business, the Group has in place flexible funding facilities to ensure liquidity risk is minimised.

Financing arrangements
The Group had access to the following undrawn borrowing facilities at the end of the reporting period:

Floating rate

Expiring within one year (revolving cash advance facility)

Expiring beyond one year (revolving cash advance facility)

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

 30,000 

 200,000 

 230,000 

 50,000 

 200,000 

 250,000 

The long-term revolving cash advance facility has two tranches each comprising $100 million and are set to expire 2 June 2014 and 2 June 2015 
respectively. The long-term revolving cash advance facilities may be drawn at any time and are subject to the Group continuing to meet its 
covenants. At balance date these facilities remain undrawn.

In addition to the above, in the prior year the Group entered into a 1 year $50 million revolving credit facility on 13 April 2011 for the purpose of 
funding the acquisition of the sass & bide business. This facility has now been reduced to a $30 million revolving credit facility and extended for 
an additional year. 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

7
7

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2.  Financial risk management  continued

(c) Liquidity risk  continued
Maturities of financial liabilities
The tables below analyse the Group’s financial liabilities; into relevant maturity groupings based on their contractual maturities for:

(a)  all non-derivative financial liabilities, and

(b)   net and gross settled derivative financial instruments for which the contractual maturities are essential for an understanding of the timing  

of the cash flows;

The amounts disclosed in the table are the contractual undiscounted cash flows. Balances due within 12 months equal their carrying amounts  
as the impact of discounting is not significant. For interest rate swaps the cash flows have been estimated using forward interest rates applicable 
at the end of the reporting period.

Contractual maturities  
of financial liabilities 

28 July 2012

non-derivatives
Non-interest bearing
Variable rate
Fixed rate
total non-derivatives
Derivatives
Net settled (interest rate swaps)
Gross settled
 – (inflow)
 – outflow

total derivatives

Contractual maturities  
of financial liabilities 

30 July 2011

non-derivatives
Non-interest bearing
Variable rate
Fixed rate
total non-derivatives
Derivatives
Net settled (interest rate swaps)
Gross settled
 – (inflow)
 – outflow

total derivatives

Less than  
6 months 
$’000

6 – 12  
months 
$’000

Between  
1 and  
2 years 
$’000

Between  
2 and  
5 years 
$’000

Over  
5 years 
$’000

Total  
contractual 
cash flows 
$’000

Carrying 
amount 
(assets)/ 
liabilities 
$’000

 397,137 
 11,247 
 – 
 408,384 

 – 
 11,219 
 – 
 11,219 

 27,553 
 22,938 
 – 
 50,491 

 – 
 443,649 
 – 
 443,649 

 195 

 193 

 226 

 (74,075)
 75,952 

 2,072 

 (35,197)
 36,277 

 1,273 

 (445)
 449 

 230 

 (42)

 – 
 – 

 (42)

 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 – 

 – 
 – 

 – 

 424,690 
 489,053 
 – 
 913,743 

 424,690 
 421,193 
 – 
 845,883 

 572 

 1,785 

 (109,717)
 112,678 

 3,533 

 – 
 2,490 

 4,275 

Less than  
6 months 
$’000

6 – 12  
months 
$’000

Between  
1 and  
2 years 
$’000

Between  
2 and  
5 years 
$’000

Over  
5 years 
$’000

Total  
contractual 
cash flows 
$’000

Carrying 
amount 
(assets)/ 
liabilities 
$’000

 414,935 
 5,742 
 – 
 420,677 

 – 
 20,462 
 – 
 20,462 

 – 
 24,396 
 – 
 24,396 

 31,650 
 471,799 
 – 
 503,449 

 (135)

 148 

 (54,518)
 61,463 

 6,810 

 (15,570)
 16,726 

 1,304 

 – 

 – 
 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 
 – 

 – 

 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 – 

 – 
 – 

 – 

 446,585 
 522,399 
 – 
 968,984 

 446,585 
 419,591 
 – 
 866,176 

 13 

 (258)

 (70,088)
 78,189 

 8,114 

 – 
 7,476 

 7,218

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

8
7

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(d) Fair value measurements
The fair value of financial assets and financial liabilities must be estimated for recognition and measurement or for disclosure purposes.

AASB 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures requires disclosure of fair value measurements by level of the following fair value measurement hierarchy:

(a) quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities (level 1);

(b)  inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liabilities either directly (as prices)  

or indirectly (derived from prices) (level 2); and

(c)  inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs) (level 3).

The following tables present the Group’s assets and liabilities measured and recognised at fair value at 28 July 2012 and 30 July 2011.

Group – at 28 July 2012

Assets

Derivatives used for hedging

total assets

liabilities

Derivatives used for hedging

total liabilities

Group – at 30 July 2011

Assets

Derivatives used for hedging

total assets

liabilities

Derivatives used for hedging

total liabilities

Level 1  
$’000

Level 2  
$’000

Level 3  
$’000

Total  
$’000

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 4,275 

 4,275 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

Level 1  
$’000

Level 2  
$’000

Level 3  
$’000

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 258 

 258 

 7,476 

 7,476 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 4,275 

 4,275 

Total  
$’000

 258 

 258 

 7,476 

 7,476 

The fair value of financial instruments that are not traded in an active market (for example, over-the-counter derivatives) is determined using 
valuation techniques. The Group uses quoted market prices or dealer quotes of similar instruments in order to estimate fair value for long-term 
debt instruments held. The fair value of interest rate swaps is calculated as the present value of the estimated future cash flows. The fair value 
of forward exchange contracts is determined using forward exchange market rates at the end of the reporting period. These instruments are 
included in level 2 and comprise derivative financial instruments.

The carrying amounts of trade receivables and payables are assumed to approximate their fair values due to their short-term nature. The fair 
value of financial liabilities for disclosure purposes is estimated by discounting the future contractual cash flows at the current market interest 
rate that is available to the Group for similar financial instruments.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

7
9

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3.  Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Estimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are based 
on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of 
future events that may have a financial impact on the entity and that 
are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances.

(a) Critical accounting estimates and assumptions
The Group makes estimates and assumptions concerning the future. 
The resulting accounting estimates will, by definition, seldom equal 
the related actual results. The estimates and assumptions that have 
a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial period are 
discussed below.

(i) Income taxes
The Group is subject to income taxes in Australia and jurisdictions 
where it has foreign operations. Significant judgement is required in 
determining the worldwide provision for income taxes. There are many 
transactions and calculations undertaken during the ordinary course 
of business for which the ultimate tax determination is uncertain. The 
Group recognises tax assets and liabilities based on its best estimate 
of the tax implications of the underlying transactions. Where the final 
tax outcome is different from the amounts that were initially recorded, 
such differences will impact the current tax provision and deferred  
tax assets and liabilities in the period in which the final determination 
is made.

(ii) Impairment
The Group tests annually whether goodwill and indefinite lived 
intangibles have suffered any impairment, in accordance with the 
accounting policy stated in note 1(i). The recoverable amount of 
cash generating units have been determined based on value in use 
calculations at a store level. Goodwill and certain intangibles can only be 
tested for impairment at the level of the Myer Group as a whole. These 
calculations require the use of assumptions. Refer to note 14 for details 
of these assumptions. Should assumptions about future cash flows 
prove incorrect, the Group may be at risk of impairment write-downs.

(iii) Recoverable amount of inventory
Management has assessed the value of inventory that is likely to be 
sold below cost using past experience and judgement on the likely 
sell through rates of various items of inventory, and booked a provision 
for this amount. To the extent that these judgements and assumptions 
prove incorrect, the Company may be exposed to potential additional 
inventory write-downs in future periods.

4.  Segment information

Management has determined the operating segments based on the 
reports reviewed by the Chief Executive Officer that are used to make 
strategic decisions about the allocation of resources.

The Chief Executive Officer considers the business based on total store 
and product portfolio, and has identified that the Group operates in 
Australia in the department store retail segment.

As a result of the acquisition of sass & bide during the prior year, the 
Group also undertakes activities outside the department store retail 
business. On the basis that this aspect of the business represents less 
than 10% of the total Group’s operations, it has not been disclosed  
as a separate reporting segment.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

0
8

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5.  Revenue and other income

revenue from continuing operations
Sales revenue

Total sales value (excluding GST) 

Concession sales

Sale of goods (excluding GST) 

Sales revenue deferred under customer loyalty program

Revenue from sale of goods (excluding GST)

Other revenue

Concessions revenue

Rental revenue

Finance revenue

Interest revenue

Remeasurement of financial liability

Finance revenue

Total revenue

other income from continuing operations

Other

Consolidated

2012 
52 weeks 
$’000

2011 
52 weeks 
$’000

 3,119,119 

 3,158,774 

 (467,207)

 (451,867)

 2,651,912 

 2,706,907 

 (39,212)

 (40,104)

 2,612,700 

 2,666,803 

 113,305 

 109,329 

 146 

 200 

 113,451 

 109,529 

 1,499 

 3,000 

 4,499 

 2,169 

 1,097 

 3,266 

 2,730,650 

 2,778,501 

 26,844 

 26,844 

 46,410 

 46,410 

Other income from continuing operations includes revenue in relation to the financial services business, forfeited lay-by deposits, customer 
delivery fees, commission on EFT transactions, gift card non-redemption income and the 2011 financial year included profit underpinning 
received in relation to the Myer Melbourne store redevelopment.

profit on sale of financial asset

Net profit on sale of financial asset 

 – 

 11,680 

In the prior period, the Group disposed of its interest in equity securities of Harsyn Pty Ltd (holding company of Harris Scarfe Australia Pty Ltd) 
and Australian Geographic Retail Pty Ltd.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

8
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
6.  Expenses

profit before income tax includes the following specific expenses:

Employee benefits expenses

Defined contribution superannuation expense

Other employee benefits expenses

Total employee benefits expenses

Total depreciation, amortisation, write-off expense

Finance costs

Interest and finance charges paid/payable

Fair value (gains)/losses on interest rate swap cash flow hedges – transfer from equity

Finance costs expensed

Rental expense relating to operating leases

Minimum lease payments

Contingent rentals

Total rental expense relating to operating leases

Foreign exchange (gains)/losses

Net foreign exchange (gains)/losses

Net loss/(gain) on foreign currency derivatives not qualifying as hedges

Impairment of assets – inventory

Consolidated

2012 
52 weeks 
$’000

2011 
52 weeks 
$’000

 35,443 

 407,225 

 442,668 

 81,858 

 34,113 

 150 

 34,263 

 32,653 

 380,965 

 413,618 

 78,981 

 37,961 

 (311)

 37,650 

 193,142 

 187,311 

 6,249 

 8,287 

 199,392 

 195,598 

 (8,320)

 (3,984)

 – 

 (8,320)

 15,413 

 – 

 (3,984)

 17,479 

Store closure costs and restructuring costs

 10,476 
Store closure and restructuring costs represents redundancy costs and the write-down or impairment of assets and inventory associated with the 
decision to exit stores and certain business categories.

 18,450 

Write-back of fixed lease rental increases provision

 – 
Due to the signing of a new lease for a store, the fixed lease rental increase provision for this store has been written back to the income statement.

 (23,109)

profit for the period includes the following items  
that are unusual because of their nature, size or incidence.
Expenses incurred in relation to the Initial Public Offering of shares in the Company, classified as:

 – Administration expenses

 – Net finance costs

Total expenses incurred in relation to the Initial Public Offering of shares in the Company

Less: Applicable income tax benefit

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 5,031 

 – 

 5,031 

 (1,509)

 3,522

In 2010, the Company listed on the Australian Securities Exchange (ASX). The Initial Public Offering of shares in the Company resulted in the 
Company incurring significant one-off expenses during prior periods that do not form part of the ongoing operations of the business. Costs 
categorised as Administration expenses in the prior period represent the retention bonuses payable to key staff as a result of the listing of 
the Company.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

2
8

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7.  Income tax expense

(a) Income tax expense
Current tax
Deferred tax

Income tax expense is attributable to:
Profit from continuing operations

Aggregate income tax expense

Income tax expense from operations before IPO costs 
Income tax benefit on IPO costs 

Deferred income tax (revenue) expense included in income tax expense comprises:
(Increase) decrease in deferred tax assets (note 13)
(Decrease) increase in deferred tax liabilities (note 18)

(b) Numerical reconciliation of income tax expense to prima facie tax payable
Profit from continuing operations before income tax expense including IPO transaction  
costs and other non-recurring IPO related charges and before income tax expense

Tax at the Australian tax rate of 30% (2011: 30%)
Tax effect of amounts which are not deductible (taxable) in calculating taxable income:
  Non-deductible acquisition costs 
  Non-deductible entertainment

Impairment loss on intangible assets

  Sundry items

  Adjustments for current tax of prior periods

Income tax expense

(c) Amounts recognised directly in equity
Aggregate current and deferred tax arising in the reporting period and not recognised in net profit or loss or 
other comprehensive income but directly debited or credited to equity
  Net deferred tax – debited (credited) directly to equity (note 22(b))

(d) Tax expense (income) relating to items of other comprehensive income
Cash flow hedges

Consolidated

2012 
52 weeks 
$’000

2011 
52 weeks 
$’000

 38,071 
 25,730 

 63,801 

 63,801 

 63,801 

 63,801 
 – 

 63,801 

 16,679 
 9,051 

 25,730 

 42,616 
 17,346 

 59,962 

 59,962 

 59,962 

 61,470 
 (1,508)

 59,962 

 12,739 
 4,607 

 17,346 

 204,868 

 61,460 

 219,626 

 65,888 

 – 
 32 
 3,226 
 (724)

 63,994 
 (193)

 63,801 

 (587)

 (587)

 (535)

 (535)

 228 
 26 
 – 
 (531)

 65,611 
 (5,649)

 59,962 

 969 

 969 

 106 

 106 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

8
3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
8.  Current assets – Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash on hand

Cash at bank

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

 2,945 

 35,113 

 38,058 

2011 
$’000

 3,046 

 34,228 

 37,274

Risk exposure
The Group’s exposure to interest rate risk is discussed in note 2. The maximum exposure to credit risk at the end of the reporting period is the 
carrying amount of each class of cash and cash equivalents mentioned above.

9.  Current assets – Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables
Provision for impairment of receivables (note(a))

Other receivables
Prepayments

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

 5,235 

 (411)

 4,824 

 4,803 

 8,085 

 12,888 

 17,712 

2011 
$’000

 5,409 

 (702)

 4,707 

 12,469 

 7,209 

 19,678 

 24,385

(a) Impaired trade receivables
As at 28 July 2012 current trade receivables of the Group with a nominal value of $411 thousands (2011: $702 thousands) were impaired.  
The amount of the provision was $411 thousands (2011: $702 thousands). The individually impaired receivables mainly relate to wholesalers.

The ageing of these receivables is as follows:

Up to 3 months

Over 3 months

Movements in the provision for impairment of receivables are as follows:

Opening balance

Provision for impairment recognised during the period

Receivables written off during the period as uncollectible

Unused amount reversed

Closing balance

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

 19 

 392 

 411 

2011 
$’000

 45 

 657 

 702

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

 702 

 58 

 (309)

 (40)

 411 

2011 
$’000

 290 

 456 

 (16)

 (28)

 702 

The creation and release of the provision for impaired receivables has been included in ‘administration expenses’ in the income statement. 
Amounts charged to the allowance account are generally written off when there is no expectation of recovering additional cash.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

4
8

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(b) Past due but not impaired
As of 28 July 2012, trade receivables of $1,806 thousands (2011: $721 thousands) were past due but not impaired. These relate to a number of 
independent debtors for whom there is no recent history of default. The ageing analysis of these trade receivables is as follows:

Up to 3 months

Over 3 months

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

 1,720 

 86 

 1,806 

2011 
$’000

 483 

 238 

 721 

Based on the credit history of these classes, it is expected that these amounts will be received and are not impaired. 

(c) Foreign exchange and interest rate risk
Information about the Group’s exposure to foreign currency risk and interest rate risk in relation to trade and other receivables is provided in note 2.

(d) Fair values and credit risk
Due to the short-term nature of these receivables, their carrying amount is assumed to approximate their fair value.

The maximum exposure to credit risk at the end of the reporting period is the carrying amount of each class of receivables mentioned above. 
Refer to note 2 for more information on the financial risk management policy of the Group and the credit quality of the entities’ trade receivables.

10.  Current assets – Inventories

Retail inventories

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

 385,702 

 381,261 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

8
5

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
11.  Derivative financial instruments

non-current assets
Interest rate swap contracts (i)

Total non-current derivative financial instrument assets

Current liabilities
Forward foreign exchange contracts (ii)

Total current derivative financial instrument liabilities

non-current liabilities
Interest rate swap contracts (i)

Total non-current derivative financial instrument liabilities

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

 – 

 – 

 2,490 

 2,490 

 1,785 

 1,785 

2011 
$’000

 258 

 258 

 7,476 

 7,476 

 – 

 –

(a) Instruments used by the Group
The Group is party to derivative financial instruments in the normal course of business in order to hedge exposure to fluctuations in interest and 
foreign exchange rates in accordance with the Group’s financial risk management policies (refer to note 2).

(i) Interest rate swap contracts
Bank loans of the Group currently bear an average variable interest rate of 5.19% (2011: 6.66%). It is policy to protect part of the loans from 
exposure to increasing interest rates. Accordingly, the Group has entered into interest rate swap contracts under which it is obliged to receive 
interest at variable rates and to pay interest at fixed rates.

Swaps currently in place cover approximately 24% (2011: 19%) of the Group’s debt facility (refer to note 17 for details of the Group’s borrowings). 
The notional principal amounts used in the swap agreements match the terms of the debt facilities. In relation to the debt facilities the fixed 
interest rates range between 3.985% and 3.990% (2011: 4.35% and 4.75%) and the variable rates under the swap agreements are the Bank Bill 
Swap Rate bid (BBSY Bid).

The contracts require settlement of net interest receivable or payable each three months. The contracts are settled on a net basis.

The gain or loss from remeasuring the hedging instruments at fair value is deferred in equity in the hedging reserve, to the extent that the hedge 
is effective, and reclassified into the income statement when the hedged interest expense is recognised. In the period ended 28 July 2012 nil was 
reclassified in profit and loss (2011: nil) and included in finance cost. There was no hedge ineffectiveness in the current period.

(ii) Forward exchange contracts – cash flow hedges
The Group makes purchases in numerous currencies, primarily US dollars. In order to protect against exchange rate movements, the Group has 
entered into forward exchange contracts to purchase US dollars.

These contracts are hedging highly probable forecasted purchases for the ensuing financial period. The contracts are timed to mature when 
payments for shipments of inventory are scheduled to be made.

The portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument that is determined to be an effective hedge is recognised directly in equity. When  
the cash flows occur, the Group adjusts the initial measurement of the inventory recognised in the balance sheet by the related amount deferred 
in equity.

During the period ended 28 July 2012 a gain of $0.1 million (2011: gain of $1.8 million) was reclassified from equity and included in the cost of 
inventory. There was no hedge ineffectiveness in the current or prior period.

(b) Risk exposures
Information about the Group’s exposure to credit risk, foreign exchange and interest rate risk is provided in note 2. The maximum exposure to 
credit risk at the end of the reporting period is the carrying amount of each class of derivative financial assets mentioned above.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

6
8

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
12.  Non-current assets – Property, plant and equipment

Consolidated

At 31 July 2010
Cost
Accumulated depreciation

Net book amount

period ended 30 July 2011
Opening net book amount
Acquisition of subsidiary
Additions
Transfer between classes
Assets written off – cost
Assets written off – accumulated depreciation
Depreciation charge

Closing net book amount

At 30 July 2011
Cost
Accumulated depreciation

Net book amount

period ended 28 July 2012
Opening net book amount
Additions
Transfer between classes
Assets written off – cost
Assets written off – accumulated depreciation
Depreciation charge
Impairment loss

Closing net book amount

At 28 July 2012
Cost
Accumulated depreciation

Net book amount

Freehold  
land  
$’000 

Freehold 
buildings 
$’000

Fixtures and 
fittings  
$’000

Plant and  
equipment  
$’000

Capital 
works  
in progress 
$’000

Total  
$’000

 10,100 
 – 

 10,100 

 10,100 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 10,100 

 10,100 
 – 

 10,100 

 10,100 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 10,100 

 10,100 
 – 

 10,100 

 19,500 
 (2,031)

 17,469 

 17,469 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 (488)

 16,981 

 19,500 
 (2,519)

 16,981 

 16,981 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 (487)
 – 

 16,494 

 19,500 
 (3,006)

 16,494 

 343,035 
 (114,206)

 228,829 

 228,829 
 235 
 12,254 
 99,566 
 (2)
 2 
 (39,320)

 301,564 

 455,088 
 (153,524)

 301,564 

 301,564 
 14,378 
 (48,224)
 (37,022)
 36,261 
 (28,616)
 (1,000)

 193,125 
 (55,296)

 137,829 

 137,829 
 3,974 
 11,942 
 53,026 
 797 
 (797)
 (19,778)

 186,993 

 262,864 
 (75,871)

 186,993 

 186,993 
 14,340 
 59,782 
 (2,845)
 2,589 
 (29,655)
 – 

 73,823 
 – 

 73,823 

 639,583 
 (171,533)

 468,050 

 73,823 
 10 
 80,909 
 (135,241)
 – 
 – 
 – 

 19,501 

 19,501 
 – 

 19,501 

 19,501 
 22,510 
 (21,668)
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 468,050 
 4,219 
 105,105 
 17,351 
 795 
 (795)
 (59,586)

 535,139 

 767,053 
 (231,914)

 535,139 

 535,139 
 51,228 
 (10,110)
 (39,867)
 38,850 
 (58,758)
 (1,000)

 237,341 

 231,204 

 20,343 

 515,482 

 384,220 
 (146,879)

 334,140 
 (102,936)

 237,341 

 231,204 

 20,343 
 – 

 20,343 

 768,303 
 (252,821)

 515,482 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

8
7

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
13.  Non-current assets – Deferred tax assets

the balance comprises temporary differences attributable to:
Employee benefits

Non-employee provisions

Deferred income

Amortising deductions

Other

Tax losses

Set off of deferred tax liabilities pursuant to set off provisions (note 18)

Net deferred tax assets

Movements:

Opening balance at 30 July 2011

Credited/(charged) to profit or loss (note 7)

Credited/(charged) to other comprehensive income

Acquisition of subsidiary

Closing balance at 28 July 2012

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

 19,839 

 5,805 

 640 

 9,090 

 15,697 

 332 

 51,403 

 (30,288)

 21,115 

 68,082 

 (16,679)

 – 

 – 

 17,770 

 19,347 

 2,204 

 14,520 

 14,241 

 – 

 68,082 

 (20,702)

 47,380 

 80,114 

 (12,739)

 (126)

 832 

 51,403 

 68,082 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

8
8

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14.  Non-current assets – Intangible assets

Consolidated

At 31 July 2010
Cost
Accumulated amortisation

Net book amount

period ended 30 July 2011
Opening net book amount
Acquisition of subsidiary
Other additions 
Transfer between classes
Assets written off
Amortisation charge**

Closing net book amount

At 30 July 2011
Cost
Accumulated amortisation

Net book amount

period ended 28 July 2012
Opening net book amount
Other additions 
Transfer between classes
Assets written off – cost
Assets written off – accumulated depreciation
Amortisation charge**
Impairment loss***

Closing net book amount

At 28 July 2012
Cost
Accumulated amortisation and impairment

Net book amount

Brand  
names and  
trademarks*  
$’000

Goodwill 
$’000

Software 
$’000

 181,248 
 (35,557)

 145,691 

 145,691 
 234 
 7,961 
 (17,351)
 – 
 (16,941)

 119,594 

 172,092 
 (52,498)

 119,594 

 119,594 
 10,226 
 10,104 
 (8,862)
 6,248 
 (19,839)
 – 

Lease  
rights  
$’000

 48,540 
 (13,270)

 35,270 

 35,270 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 (5,971)

 29,299 

Total  
$’000

 971,342 
 (50,322)

 921,020 

 921,020 
 50,900 
 12,574 
 (17,351)
 – 
 (23,263)

 943,880 

 48,540 
 (19,241)

 29,299 

 1,017,465 
 (73,585)

 943,880 

 29,299 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 (2,408)
 (10,754)

 943,880 
 18,139 
 10,104 
 (8,862)
 6,248 
 (22,606)
 (10,754)

 392,020 
 (1,495)

 390,525 

 390,525 
 23,569 
 4,613 
 – 
 – 
 (351)

 418,356 

 420,202 
 (1,846)

 418,356 

 418,356 
 7,913 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 (359)
 – 

 425,910 

 117,471 

 16,137 

 936,149 

 428,115 
 (2,205)

 425,910 

 183,560 
 (66,089)

 117,471 

 48,540 
 (32,403)

 1,036,846 
 (100,697)

 16,137 

 936,149 

 349,534 
 – 

 349,534 

 349,534 
 27,097 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 376,631 

 376,631 
 – 

 376,631 

 376,631 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 376,631 

 376,631 
 – 

 376,631 

* 

 Brand names and trademarks include certain brand names which have indefinite useful lives. The carrying amount at 28 July 2012 of the indefinite lived brands  
was $426 million (2011: $413 million).

**  Amortisation of $22.6 million (2011: $23.3 million) is included in administration and selling expenses in the income statement.
*** Impairment of $10.8 million (2011: nil) is included in store closure and restructuring costs in the income statement.

(a) Impairment tests for goodwill and intangibles with an indefinite useful life
The goodwill arising on the acquisition of the Myer business cannot be allocated to the Group’s individual cash generating units (the Group’s 
stores), and hence has been allocated to the business as a whole. Similarly, the Myer brand name, which has an indefinite useful life, has been 
allocated to the business as a whole.

The goodwill arising on the acquisition of the sass & bide business cannot be allocated to the individual cash generating units (the sass  
& bide stores), and hence has been allocated to the sass & bide business as a whole. Similarly, the sass & bide brand name, which has  
an indefinite useful life, has been allocated to the sass & bide business as a whole.

AASB 136 Impairment of Assets requires goodwill and intangible assets with an indefinite useful life to be tested annually for impairment. In 
testing these assets for impairment, the recoverable amount of each business has been determined using a value in use calculation. This 
calculation uses cash flow projections based on financial budgets approved by management covering a five-year period. Cash flows beyond  
five periods are extrapolated using a terminal growth rate of 2.5 percent. Key assumptions used in the calculation were as follows:

– discount rate (pre tax) 14.4 percent 
– terminal growth rate 2.5 percent 
– operating gross profit margin 41 percent

Neither goodwill nor indefinite lived intangibles were impaired at the end of the reporting period. Sensitivity analysis on reasonably possible 
changes in assumptions did not result in an outcome where an impairment would be required.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

8
9

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
15.  Current liabilities – Trade and other payables

Trade payables
Other payables

Trade and other payables are non-interest bearing.

16.  Current liabilities – Provisions

Employee benefits
Workers’ compensation (a)
Sales returns (b)
Other

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

 201,163 
 195,974 

 397,137 

2011 
$’000

 207,144 
 205,058 

 412,202 

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

 59,590 
 19,839 
 3,867 
 2,661 

 85,957 

2011 
$’000

 63,850 
 19,228 
 3,503 
 4,005 

 90,586

(a) Workers’ compensation
The amount represents a provision for potential workers’ compensation claims in certain states.

(b) Sales returns
The amount represents a provision for potential sales returns under the Group’s returns policy.

(c) Movements in provisions
Movements in each class of provision during the financial period, other than employee benefits, are set out below:

Workers’ 
compensation 
$’000

Sales  
returns  
$’000

Other  
$’000

Total  
$’000

 19,228 
 3,471 
 (2,860)

 19,839 

Workers’ 
compensation 
$’000

 17,324 
 6,645 
 (4,741)

 19,228 

 3,503 
 3,867 
 (3,503)

 3,867 

Sales  
returns  
$’000

 3,446 
 3,503 
 (3,446)

 3,503 

 4,005 
 9,927 
 (11,271)

 2,661 

 26,736 
 17,265 
 (17,634)

 26,367 

Other  
$’000

Total  
$’000

 6,139 
 7,248 
 (9,382)

 4,005 

 26,909 
 17,396 
 (17,569)

 26,736 

2012 consolidated
Current
Carrying amount at start of period
Additional provisions recognised during the period
Amounts utilised during the period

Carrying amount at end of period

2011 consolidated
Current
Carrying amount at start of period
Additional provisions recognised during the period
Amounts utilised during the period

Carrying amount at end of period

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

0
9

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
17.  Borrowings

non-current borrowings
Bank loans

Total borrowings

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

 421,193 

 421,193 

 419,591 

 419,591 

(a) Structure of debt
The debt funding of the Group at 28 July 2012 comprised bank loan facilities. The loan facilities comprise the following:

 – Term cash advance facility: $425 million; and

 – Revolving cash advance facility: $200 million.

These facilities were established on 29 October 2009, drawn down on the 6 November 2009 and have been amended and restated in the prior 
year on 3 June 2011. In addition to the above, the Group entered into a one-year $50 million revolving credit facility on 13 April 2011 for the 
purpose of funding the acquisition of the sass & bide business. This facility has been extended for an additional year as a $30 million revolving 
credit facility. At balance date, the following amounts remain drawn down:

2012 
$’000

 425,000 
 – 
 425,000 
 (3,807)

 421,193 

2011 
$’000

 425,000 
 – 
 425,000 
 (5,409)

 419,591 

Term

 3 years from 3 June 2011
 4 years from 3 June 2011
 3 years from 3 June 2011
 4 years from 3 June 2011

Term cash advance facility
Revolving cash advance facility

Less borrowing costs

Net borrowings per balance sheet

(i) Bank loan facilities
The terms and conditions of the Group’s bank loan facilities are as follows:

Loan facilities

Syndicated facility
Term cash advance facility – Tranche A
Term cash advance facility – Tranche B
Revolving cash advance facility – Tranche C
Revolving cash advance facility – Tranche D
Bilateral cash advance facility
Revolving cash advance facilities

Description

Term loan facility
Term loan facility
Revolving facility
Revolving facility

Amount  
$

225 million
200 million
100 million
100 million

Revolving facility

30 million

1 year from 13 April 2012

The Term cash advance facilities (Tranche A and B) are term loan facilities repayable at maturity on 2 June 2014 and 2 June 2015 respectively.  
Any amounts repaid on these facilities during the term may not be redrawn. The revolving cash advance facilities (Tranche C, D and bilateral)  
are revolving, so that amounts repaid may be redrawn during their terms.

(b) Security
The loan facilities in place at 28 July 2012 are unsecured, subject to various representations, undertakings, events of default and review events 
which are usual for facilities of this nature.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

9
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
17.  Borrowings  continued

(c) Fair value
The carrying amounts and fair values of borrowings at balance date are:

Group

Bank loans

2012

2011

Carrying 
amount  
$’000

 421,193 

 421,193 

Fair value 
$’000

 421,193 

 421,193 

Carrying 
amount  
$’000

 419,591 

 419,591 

Fair value 
$’000

 419,591 

 419,591 

The fair value of existing borrowings equals their carrying amount, as the impact of discounting is not significant.

(d) Risk exposures
Details of the Group’s exposure to risks arising from current and non-current borrowings are set out in note 2.

18.  Non-current liabilities – Deferred tax liabilities

the balance comprises temporary differences attributable to:
Property, plant, equipment and software
Deferred stamp duty
Brand names
Derivative financial instruments
Sundry items

Set off of deferred tax liabilities pursuant to set off provisions (note 13)

Net deferred tax liabilities

Movements:
Balance at beginning of period
Charged/(credited) to income statement (note 7)
Charged/(credited) to other comprehensive income
Acquisition of subsidiary

Balance at end of period

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

 19,858 
 1,141 
 8,465 
 535 
 289 

 30,288 

 10,772 
 1,309 
 8,568 
 16 
 37 

 20,702 

 (30,288)

 (20,702)

 – 

 – 

 20,702 
 9,051 
 535 
 – 

 30,288 

 9,277 
 4,607 
 (232)
 7,050 

 20,702 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

2
9

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
19.  Non-current liabilities – Provisions

Employee benefits
Fixed lease rental increases
Unfavourable lease contracts

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

 5,243 
 10,196 
 – 

 15,439 

2011 
$’000

 4,374 
 41,935 
 3,082 

 49,391

(a) Fixed lease rental increases
The Group is a party to a number of leases that include fixed rental increases during their term. In accordance with AASB 117 Leases, the total 
rentals over these leases are being expensed over the lease term on a straight-line basis. The above provision reflects the difference between the 
future committed payments under these leases and the total future expense.

(b) Unfavourable lease contracts
At the date the Myer business was acquired, the business was party to a number of unfavourable lease contracts compared to market rentals 
payable at the time. As part of the acquisition accounting, a provision was raised for the difference between the rentals committed under these 
leases and the market value of these leases. This provision has now been fully utilised.

(c) Movements in provisions
Movements in each class of provision during the financial period, other than employee benefits, are set out below:

2012 consolidated
Carrying amount at start of period
Additional amounts recognised
Amounts unused and reversed during the period
Amounts utilised during the period

Carrying amount at end of period

2011 consolidated
Carrying amount at start of period
Additional amounts recognised
Amounts unused and reversed during the period
Amounts utilised during the period

Carrying amount at end of period

Fixed  
lease  
rental 
increases 
$’000

Unfavourable  
lease  
contracts 
$’000

 41,935 
 1,832 
 (23,833)
 (9,738)

 10,196 

 45,841 
 2,391 
 – 
 (6,297)

 41,935 

 3,082 
 – 
 – 
 (3,082)

 – 

 5,322 
 – 
 – 
 (2,240)

 3,082 

Other  
$’000

 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 – 

 5,000 
 – 
 (5,000)
 – 

 – 

Total 

 45,017 
 1,832 
 (23,833)
 (12,820)

 10,196 

 56,163 
 2,391 
 (5,000)
 (8,537)

 45,017 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

9
3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
20.  Non-current liabilities – Other

Financial liability
Long-term payable
Retirement benefit obligations

21.  Contributed equity

Opening balance
Options exercised at $0.01 per ordinary share during the period
Options exercised at $1.27 per ordinary share during the period
Shares issued to Employee Share Scheme Trust at market value during the period

Less: Transaction costs arising on share issue net of tax

treasury shares
Opening balance
Shares issued to Employee Share Scheme Trust
Shares allocated on exercise of options at $0.01 during the period
Shares allocated on exercise of options at $1.27 during the period
Shares allocated on exercise of options at $2.14 during the period

Closing balance of Treasury shares

Closing balance

Notes

22(b) (iii)

Consolidated

2012  
$’000

 27,553 
 1,500
 353

 29,406

2011  
$’000

 30,553 
 2,000
 459

 33,012

2012

2011

2012

2011

Number of 
shares

Number of 
shares

 583,147,884 
 – 
 36,667 
 200,000 

 581,517,884 
 480,000 
 – 
 1,150,000 

 583,384,551 
 – 

 583,147,884 
 – 

 583,384,551 

 583,147,884 

 (306,405)
 (200,000)
 316,809 
 120,396 
 44,000 

 (537,016)
 (1,150,000)
 480,000 
 208,278 
 692,333 

 (25,200)

 (306,405)

$’000

$’000

 557,635 
 – 
 47 
 425 

 558,107 
 – 

 558,107 

 (38,156)
 (425)
 3 
 153 
 94 

 (38,331)

 553,962 
 5 
 – 
 3,668 

 557,635 
 – 

 557,635 

 (36,834)
 (3,668)
 5 
 264 
 2,077 

 (38,156)

 583,359,351 

 582,841,479 

 519,776 

 519,479 

(a) Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares entitle the holder to participate in dividends and the proceeds on winding up of the Company in proportion to the number  
of and amounts paid on the shares held.

On a show of hands every holder of ordinary shares present at a meeting in person or by proxy, is entitled to one vote, and upon a poll each 
share is entitled to one vote.

(b) Treasury shares
Treasury shares are shares in Myer Holdings Limited that are held by the Myer Equity Plans Trust for the purposes of issuing shares under the  
Myer Equity Incentive Plan (see note 35 for further information).

(c) Employee share and option schemes
Information relating to the employee share and option schemes, including details of shares issued under the scheme, is set out in note 35.

(d) Share issue and exercise of options
The Company issued a further 36,667 new ordinary shares during the reporting period at $1.27 per share.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

4
9

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(e) Capital risk management
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard their ability to continue as a going concern, so that they can continue to provide 
returns for shareholders and benefits for other stakeholders and to maintain optimal capital structure to reduce the cost of capital.

In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure, the Group may adjust the amount of dividends paid to shareholders, return capital to 
shareholders, issue new shares or sell assets to reduce debt.

Consistently with others in the industry, the Group monitors capital on the basis of various balance sheet ratios including the gearing ratio. This 
ratio is calculated as net debt divided by total capital. Net debt is calculated as total borrowings less cash and cash equivalents. Total capital is 
calculated as ‘equity’ as shown in the balance sheet plus net debt.

The gearing ratios at 28 July 2012 and 30 July 2011 were as follows:

Total borrowings
Less: cash and cash equivalents
Net debt
Total equity

Total capital

Gearing ratio

Notes

17
8

Consolidated

2012  
$’000

 421,193 
 (38,058)
 383,135
 877,680

2011  
$’000

 419,591 
 (37,274)
 382,317
 861,330

 1,260,815

 1,243,647

30%

31%

The decrease in the gearing ratio during 2012 was primarily driven by the increase in equity associated with surplus retained profits over 
dividends paid during the year.

22.  Reserves and retained profits
(a) Retained profits
Movements in retained profits were as follows:

Balance at beginning of period
Items of other comprehensive income recognised directly in retained earnings
  Actuarial (losses)/gains on retirement benefit obligation, net of tax
Dividends
Net profit/(loss) for the period

Balance at end of period

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

 349,396 

 320,470 

 – 
 (125,404)
 139,365 

 363,357 

 183 
 (130,981)
 159,724 

 349,396 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

9
5

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
22.  Reserves and retained profits  continued

(b) Reserves

Share-based payments (i)
Cash flow hedges (ii)
Other reserve (iii)
Foreign currency translation reserve (iv)

Movements:
Share-based payments
Balance at beginning of period
Share-based payments expense recognised
Income tax (notes 7, 13 and 18)

Balance at end of period

Cash flow hedges
Balance at beginning of period
Revaluation – gross
Deferred tax (notes 13 and 18)
Transfer to net profit – gross
Deferred tax (notes 13 and 18)
Transfer to inventory and other assets – gross
Deferred tax (notes 13 and 18)

Balance at end of period

Other reserve
Balance at beginning of period
Other reserve recognised

Balance at end of period

Foreign currency translation reserve 
Balance at beginning of period
Currency translation differences arising during the period

Balance at end of period

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

 20,682 
 (3,837)
 (31,650)
 5 

 (14,800)

 19,314 
 1,955 
 (587)

 20,682 

 (2,699)
 2,699 
 (1,526)
 (3,442)
 1,033 
 140 
 (42)

 (3,837)

 (31,650)
 – 

 (31,650)

 (85)
 90 

 5 

2011 
$’000

 19,314 
 (2,699)
 (31,650)
 (85)

 (15,120)

 19,754 
 (1,409)
 969 

 19,314 

 88 
 (6,009)
 1,041 
 1,289 
 (387)
 1,827 
 (548)

 (2,699)

 – 
 (31,650)

 (31,650)

 – 
 (85)

 (85)

(i) Share-based payments
The Share-based payments reserve is used to recognise the fair value of options issued to employees but not exercised.

(ii) Cash flow hedges
The hedging reserve is used to record gains or losses on a hedging instrument in a cash flow hedge that are recognised directly in equity,  
as described in note 1(n). Amounts are recognised in profit and loss when the associated hedged transaction affects profit and loss.

(iii) Other reserve
Under the shareholders’ agreement entered into with the non-controlling shareholders at the time of acquisition, the Group holds a call option 
over the non-controlling shareholders’ 35% interest in Boogie & Boogie Pty Ltd, the owner of sass & bide, and the non-controlling shareholders 
have a corresponding put option. These options are exercisable at any time after two years from acquisition date at a market value of the shares 
at that time based on a formula contained within the shareholders’ agreement. The potential liability of the Group under the put option has been 
estimated at acquisition date based on expectations on the timing of exercise and the exercise price at that future point in time, discounted to 
present value using the Group’s incremental borrowing rate. The recognition of the put option liability at acquisition date has resulted in the 
recognition of an amount to the other reserve within shareholders’ equity and a financial liability within non-current liabilities other. This liability  
is reassessed each reporting date for any change in the expected liability on exercise, with the impact recognised within net finance costs within 
the income statement. 

(iv) Foreign currency translation reserve 
Exchange differences arising on translation of the foreign controlled entity are recognised in other comprehensive income as described in note 
1(d) and accumulated in a separate reserve within equity. The cumulative amount is reclassified to profit or loss when the net investment is 
disposed of.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

6
9

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
23.  Dividends

(a) Ordinary shares
Final dividend for the period ended 30 July 2011 of 11.5 cents (2010: 11.5 cents)  
per fully paid share paid 16 November 2011 (2010: 4 November 2010)
  Fully franked based on tax paid at 30%
Interim dividend for the period ended 28 July 2012 of 10.0 cents (2011: 11.0 cents)  
per fully paid share paid 10 May 2012 (2011: 12 May 2011)
  Fully franked based on tax paid at 30%

Total dividends provided for or paid

(b) Dividends not recognised at the end of the reporting period
In addition to the above dividends, since period end the directors have recommended the payment of a final 
dividend of 9.0 cents per fully paid ordinary share, (2011: 11.5 cents) fully franked based on tax paid at 30%. 
 The aggregate amount of the proposed dividend expected to be paid on 14 November 2012, but not 
recognised as a liability at period end, is:

(c) Franked dividends
The franked portions of the final dividends recommended after 28 July 2012 will be franked out of existing franking 
credits or out of franking credits arising from the payment of income tax in the period ending 27 July 2013.

Franking credits available for subsequent financial periods based on a tax rate of 30% (2011: 30%)

The above amounts represent the balance of the franking account as at the reporting date, adjusted for:

(a) franking credits that will arise from the payment of the amount of the provision for income tax;

(b) franking debits that will arise from the payment of dividends recognised as a liability at the reporting date; and

(c) franking credits that will arise from the receipt of dividends recognised as receivables at the reporting date.

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

 67,068 

 66,870 

 58,336 

 125,404 

 64,111 

 130,981 

 52,502 

 67,027 

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

 14,619 

 33,954

The consolidated amounts include franking credits that would be available to the parent entity if distributable profits of subsidiaries were  
paid as dividends.

The impact on the franking account of the dividend recommended by the directors since the end of the reporting period, but not recognised  
as a liability at the reporting date, will be a reduction in the franking account of $22 million (2011: reduction of $29 million).

24.  Key Management Personnel disclosures

(a) Key Management Personnel compensation
Key Management Personnel compensation for the period ended 28 July 2012 is set out below. The Key Management Personnel of the Group are 
persons having the authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the Company’s activities directly or indirectly, including 
the directors of Myer Holdings Limited.

Short term employee benefits
Post employment benefits
Long-term benefits
Termination and other benefits
Share-based payments

Detailed remuneration disclosures are provided in the Remuneration Report on pages 44 to 59.

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

 5,037,909 
 230,576 
 309,388 
 – 
 1,158,516 

2011 
$’000

 4,955,262 
 233,723 
 921,901 
 – 
 (1,305,329)

 6,736,389 

 4,805,557 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

9
7

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
24.  Key Management Personnel disclosures  continued

(b) Equity instrument disclosures relating to Key Management Personnel
(i) Option and performance rights holdings
The numbers of options over ordinary shares in the Company held during the financial period by each director of Myer Holdings Limited and 
other Key Management Personnel of the Group, including their personally related parties, are set out below.

2012

name
Directors of  
Myer Holdings limited
Howard McDonald
Bernard Brookes
Tom Flood
Rupert Myer
Anne Brennan
Peter Hay
Chris Froggatt
other Key Management 
personnel of the Group
Mark Ashby
Penny Winn
Greg Travers
Nick Abboud
Mark Goddard

Balance  
at start  
of the  
period

Granted  
as  
compen-
sation

Exercised

Other 
changes

Balance  
at end  
of the  
period

Vested  
and 
 exercisable

Unvested

 26,667 
 7,380,394 
 10,000 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 1,340,168 
 1,320,168 
 478,836 
 986,036 
 – 

 – 
 2,058,383 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 (26,667)
 – 
 (10,000)
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 – 
 9,438,777 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 260,728 
 – 
 260,728 
 214,986 
 – 

 – 
 – 
 (58,668)
 (5,868)
 – 

 – 
 (1,320,168)
 – 
 – 
 – 

 1,600,896 
 – 
 680,896 
 1,195,154 
 – 

 586,666 
 – 
 – 
 30,000 
 – 

 – 
 9,438,777 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 1,014,230 
 – 
 680,896 
 1,165,154 

Penny Winn has been included as part of Key Management Personnel for 2012, but due to the cessation of employment with Myer on 8 December 
2011, option holdings have been removed in “Other changes”. 

All vested options are exercisable at the end of the period. 

Balance  
at start  
of the  
period

Granted  
as  
compen-
sation

Exercised

Other 
changes

Balance  
at end  
of the  
period

Vested  
and 
 exercisable

Unvested

 26,667 
 7,860,394 
 10,000 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 1,420,168 
 1,320,168 
 478,836 
 1,016,036 

 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 – 
 (480,000)
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 (80,000)
 – 
 – 
(30,000)

 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 26,667 
 7,380,394 
 10,000 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 1,340,168 
 1,320,168 
 478,836 
 986,036 

 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 26,667 
 7,380,394 
 10,000 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 253,333 
 166,667 
 – 
 – 

 1,086,835 
 1,153,501 
 478,836 
 986,036 

2011

name
Directors of  
Myer Holdings limited
Howard McDonald
Bernard Brookes
Tom Flood
Rupert Myer
Anne Brennan
Peter Hay
Chris Froggatt
other Key Management 
personnel of the Group
Mark Ashby
Penny Winn
Greg Travers
Nick Abboud

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

8
9

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(ii) Share holdings
The number of shares in the Company held during the financial period by each director of Myer Holdings Limited and other Key Management 
Personnel of the Group, including their personally related parties, are set out below. There were no shares granted during the reporting period  
as compensation.

2012

name
Directors of Myer Holdings limited
ordinary shares
Howard McDonald
Bernard Brookes
Tom Flood
Rupert Myer
Anne Brennan
Peter Hay
Chris Froggatt
other Key Management personnel of the Group
ordinary shares
Mark Ashby
Penny Winn
Greg Travers
Nick Abboud
Mark Goddard

Received  
during  
the period  
on the  
exercise  
of options

Balance  
at the  
start of  
the period

Other  
changes  
during  
the period

Balance  
at the  
end of  
the period

 2,047,723 
 11,546,630 
 390,000 
 725,710 
 53,658 
 12,195 
 10,040 

 245,257 
 200,000 
 1,537,140 
 – 
 – 

 26,667 
 – 
 10,000 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 – 
 – 
 58,668 
 5,868 
 – 

 – 
 (763,250)
 – 
 8,289 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 2,074,390 
 10,783,380 
 400,000 
 733,999 
 53,658 
 12,195 
 10,040 

 – 
 (200,000)
 (80,000)
 (5,868)
 – 

 245,257 
 – 
 1,515,808 
 – 
 – 

Penny Winn has been included as part of Key Management Personnel for 2012, but due to the cessation of employment with Myer on 8 December 
2011, option holdings have been removed in “Other changes during the period.” 

2011

name
Directors of Myer Holdings limited
ordinary shares
Howard McDonald
Bernard Brookes
Tom Flood
Rupert Myer
Anne Brennan
Peter Hay
Chris Froggatt
other Key Management personnel of the Group
ordinary shares
Mark Ashby
Penny Winn
Greg Travers
Nick Abboud

Received  
during  
the period  
on the  
exercise  
of options

Balance  
at the  
start of  
the period

Other  
changes  
during  
the period

Balance  
at the  
end of  
the period

 2,047,723 
 11,066,630 
 390,000 
 725,710 
 53,658 
 12,195 
 – 

 185,257 
 200,000 
 2,017,140 
 288,132 

 – 
 480,000 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 

 80,000 
 – 
 – 
 30,000 

 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 – 
 10,040 

 2,047,723 
 11,546,630 
 390,000 
 725,710 
 53,658 
 12,195 
 10,040 

 (20,000)
 – 
 (480,000)

 (318,132)

 245,257 
 200,000 
 1,537,140 
 – 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

9
9

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
24.  Key Management Personnel disclosures  continued

(c) Loans to Key Management Personnel

Details of loans made to directors of Myer Holdings Limited and other Key Management Personnel of the Group, including their personally 
related parties, are set out below.

(i) Aggregates for Key Management Personnel
In 2011 and 2012 there were no loans to individuals at any time.

(ii) Individuals with loans above $100,000 during the financial period
In 2011 and 2012 there were no loans to individuals that exceeded $100,000 at any time.

(d) Other transactions with Key Management Personnel
There were no transactions with Key Management Personnel or entities related to them, other than compensation.

25.  Remuneration of auditors

During the period the following fees were paid or payable for services provided by the auditor of the Group, and its related practices:

(a) PwC Australia
(i) Assurance services
Audit services
  Audit and review of financial statements and other audit work under the Corporations Act 2001
Other assurance services
  Audit of rent certificates
  Other

Total remuneration for other assurance services

Total remuneration for assurance services

(ii) Taxation services
  Tax consulting and tax advice
(iii) Other services
  Other services

Total remuneration of PwC Australia

(b) Overseas practices of PwC
(i) Assurance services
Audit services
  Audit and review of financial statements and other audit work under the Corporations Act 2001
(ii) Taxation services
  Tax consulting and tax advice
(iii) Other services
  Other services

Total remuneration for overseas practises of PwC

(c) Other firms
(i) Assurance services
Audit services
  Audit and review of financial statements and other audit work under the Corporations Act 2001
Other assurance services
  Audit of rent certificates
  Other

Total remuneration for other assurance services

Total remuneration for assurance services

(ii) Taxation services
  Tax consulting and tax advice

Total remuneration of Other firms

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

0
0
1

Consolidated

2012 
52 weeks 
$

2011 
52 weeks 
$

 389,075 

 334,460 

 41,400 
 – 

 41,400 

 34,100 
 29,026 

 63,126 

 430,475 

 397,586 

 166,946 

 284,748 

 40,000 

 637,421 

 51,729 

 734,063 

 37,026 

 16,712 

 6,546 

 60,284 

 – 

 – 
 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 60,593 

 60,593 

 69,500 

 3,000 
 4,231 

 7,231 

 76,731 

 19,000 

 95,731 

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
26.  Contingencies

Contingent liabilities
The Group had contingent liabilities at 28 July 2012 in respect of:

Guarantees
For information about guarantees given by entities within the Group, including the parent entity, please refer to notes 30 and 33.

While the amount and timing of any contingencies are uncertain, no material losses are anticipated in respect of the above contingent liabilities.

27.  Commitments

(a) Capital commitments
Capital expenditure contracted for at the end of the reporting period but not recognised as liabilities is as follows:

Property, plant, equipment and software
Payable:
Within one year
Later than one year but not later than five years
Later than five years

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

 7,481 
 – 
 – 

 7,481 

 13,613 
 – 
 – 

 13,613 

(b) Lease commitments: Group as lessee
Operating leases
The Group leases the majority of its stores and warehouses under non-cancellable operating leases expiring within one to 30 years. The leases 
have varying terms, escalation clauses and renewal rights. On renewal, the terms of the leases are renegotiated.

Commitments for minimum lease payments in relation  
to non-cancellable operating leases are payable as follows:
Within one year
Later than one year but not later than five years
Later than five years

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

 201,016 
 700,046 
 1,825,835 

 195,403 
 668,759 
 1,586,957 

 2,726,897 

 2,451,119

Not included in the above commitments are contingent rental payments that may arise in the event that sales made by certain leased stores exceed 
a pre-determined amount. The contingent rentals payable as a percentage of sales revenue and the relevant thresholds vary from lease to lease.

28.  Related party transactions

(a) Parent entities
The parent entity within the Group is Myer Holdings Limited, a listed public company, incorporated in Australia.

(b) Subsidiaries
Interests in subsidiaries are set out in note 29.

(c) Key Management Personnel
Disclosures relating to Key Management Personnel are set out in note 24.

(d) Transactions with other related parties
There were no transactions with other related parties during the current period.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

1
0
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
29.  Subsidiaries and transactions with non-controlling interests

(a) Investments in subsidiaries
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the assets, liabilities and results of the following subsidiaries in accordance with the 
accounting policy described in note 1(b):

Name of entity

NB Elizabeth Pty Ltd
NB Russell Pty Ltd
NB Lonsdale Pty Ltd
NB Collins Pty Ltd
Warehouse Solutions Pty Ltd
Myer Group Pty Ltd
Myer Pty Ltd
Myer Group Finance Limited
The Myer Emporium Pty Ltd
ACT Employment Services Pty Ltd
Myer Employee Share Plan Pty Ltd
Myer Travel Pty Ltd
Myer Sourcing Asia Ltd
Shanghai Myer Service Company Ltd
Boogie & Boogie Pty Ltd
sass & bide Pty Ltd
sass & bide Retail Pty Ltd
sass & bide Retail (NZ) Pty Ltd
sass & bide UK Limited
sass & bide USA inc.
sass & bide inc.

Notes

(1), (3)
(2), (3)
(2), (3)
(1), (3)
(2), (3)
(1), (3)
(1), (3)
(1), (3)
(1), (3)
(2)
(2)
(2)

(2)
(2)
(2)

Country of  
incorporation

Australia
Australia
Australia
Australia
Australia
Australia
Australia
Australia
Australia
Australia
Australia
Australia
Hong Kong
China
Australia
Australia
Australia
Australia
United Kingdom
USA

USA

Class of 
shares

Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary

Equity  
holdings(4) 
2012  
%

Equity  
holdings(4) 
2011  
%

100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
65

100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
65
65
65
65
65
65
65

Notes:
(1)   Each of these entities has been granted relief from the necessity to prepare financial statements in accordance with Class Order 98/1418 issued by the Australian Securities 

and Investments Commission.

(2)   Each of these entities is classified as small proprietary and therefore relieved from the requirement to prepare and lodge financial reports with ASIC.
(3)  Each of these entities is party to a deed of cross guarantee, refer note 30.
(4)  The proportion of ownership interest is equal to the proportion of voting power held.

(b) Transactions with non-controlling interests
There were no transactions with non-controlling interests in 2011 or 2012.

30.  Deed of cross guarantee

Myer Holdings Limited, NB Elizabeth Pty Ltd, NB Collins Pty Ltd, NB Russell Pty Ltd, Myer Group Pty Ltd, NB Lonsdale Pty Ltd, Warehouse  
Solutions Pty Ltd, Myer Group Finance Limited, Myer Pty Ltd and The Myer Emporium Pty Ltd are parties to a deed of cross guarantee under 
which each company guarantees the debts of the others. By entering into the deed, the wholly-owned entities have been relieved from the 
requirement to prepare a financial report and directors’ report under Class Order 98/1418 (as amended) issued by the Australian Securities  
and Investments Commission.

Each of the members of the extended ‘closed group’ are considered to be solvent at 28 July 2012.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

2
0
1

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(a) Consolidated income statement, statement of comprehensive income  
and summary of movements in consolidated retained earnings
The above companies represent a ‘closed group’ for the purposes of the Class Order, and as there are no other parties to the deed of cross 
guarantee that are controlled by Myer Holdings Limited, they also represent the ‘extended closed group’.

As certain group entities are not members of the closed group additional disclosure has been made in relation to the closed group.

Set out below is a consolidated income statement, a consolidated statement of comprehensive income and a summary of movements in 
consolidated retained earnings for the year ended 28 July 2012 of the closed group.

Income statement

total sales value (excluding GSt) 
Concession sales

Sale of goods (excluding GSt) 
Sales revenue deferred under customer loyalty program

revenue from sale of goods (excluding GSt)
Other operating revenue (excluding finance revenue)
Cost of goods sold 
Other income 

operating gross profit 
Selling expenses 
Administration expenses 
Store closure and restructuring costs
Write-back of fixed lease rental increases provision
Profit on sale of financial asset

earnings before interest and tax before non-recurring Ipo transaction costs and related charges
Finance revenue 
Finance costs 

net finance costs

profit before income tax before non-recurring Ipo transaction costs and related charges
Income tax expense

profit for the period before non-recurring Ipo transaction costs and related charges

Initial Public Offering (IPO) transaction costs and other non-recurring IPO related charges (after tax)

Profit for the period

Statement of comprehensive income

profit for the period
other comprehensive income
Cash flow hedges
Non-recurring IPO related transfers to profit and loss
Actuarial gains/(losses) on retirement benefit obligation
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations
Income tax relating to components of other comprehensive income

other comprehensive income for the period, net of tax

total comprehensive income for the period

Summary of movements in consolidated retained earnings

retained earnings at the beginning of the financial year
Profit for the period
Actuarial gains/(losses) on retirement benefit obligation
Dividends provided for or paid

retained earnings at the end of the financial year

2012 
 52 weeks 
$’000

 3,080,111 
 (478,905)

 2,601,206 
 (39,211)

 2,561,995 
 115,853 
 (1,448,141)
 25,908 

 1,255,615 
 (738,701)
 (293,966)
 (18,450)
 23,109 
 – 

 227,607 
 4,460 
 (34,174)

 (29,714)

 197,893 
 (61,617)

 136,276 

 – 

 136,276 

2011 
 52 weeks 
$’000

 3,145,346 
 (452,000)

 2,693,346 
 (40,104)

 2,653,242 
 109,559 
 (1,545,733)
 45,904 

 1,262,972 
 (713,060)
 (290,101)
 (10,476)
 – 
 11,680 

 261,015 
 3,236 
 (38,743)

 (35,507)

 225,508 
 (61,465)

 164,043 

 (3,522)

 160,521 

 136,276 

 160,521 

 (455)
 – 
 – 
 – 
 (552)

 (1,007)

 (2,665)
 – 
 183 
 – 
 38 

 (2,444)

 135,269 

 158,077 

 349,890 
 136,276 
 – 
 (125,404)

 360,762 

 320,167 
 160,521 
 183 
 (130,981)

 349,890 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

1
0
3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
30.  Deed of cross guarantee  continued

(b) Consolidated balance sheet
Set out below is a consolidated balance sheet as at 28 July 2012 of the closed group.

ASSetS
Current assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade and other receivables
Inventories

Total current assets

non-current assets 
Other financial assets
Derivative financial instruments
Property, plant and equipment
Deferred tax assets 
Intangible assets
Other

Total non-current assets

total assets

lIABIlItIeS
Current liabilities 
Trade and other payables 
Derivative financial instruments 
Current tax liabilities
Provisions
Other

Total current liabilities

non-current liabilities 
Borrowings 
Derivative financial instruments 
Provisions
Deferred income
Other

Total non-current liabilities

total liabilities

net assets

eQuIty 
Contributed equity
Retained profits/(losses)
Reserves

total equity

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

 30,790 
 23,726 
 378,089 

 432,605 

 41,374 
 – 
 510,760 
 27,066 
 884,193 
 3,812 

 36,149 
 26,455 
 376,406 

 439,010 

 41,368 
 258 
 530,476 
 53,635 
 891,972 
 4,420 

 1,467,205 

 1,522,129 

 1,899,810 

 1,961,139 

 394,334 
 2,207 
 14,549 
 84,899 
 1,119 

 497,108 

 421,193 
 1,785 
 15,023 
 69,821 
 29,406 

 537,228 

 409,913 
 7,247 
 32,899 
 89,954 
 3,078 

 543,091 

 419,591 
 – 
 49,153 
 62,448 
 33,012 

 564,204 

 1,034,336 

 1,107,295 

 865,474 

 853,844 

 519,776 
 360,762 
 (15,064)

 865,474 

 519,379 
 349,890 
 (15,425)

 853,844 

31.  Events occurring after the reporting period

Subsequent to 28 July 2012, the directors have determined to pay a final dividend of 9 cents per share, franked to 100 percent at the 30 percent 
corporate income tax rate, payable on 14 November 2012. The record date for this dividend is 28 September 2012.

The financial effect of the final ordinary dividend for 2012 has not been recognised in the annual financial statements for the period ended  
28 July 2012 and will be recognised in subsequent financial statements.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

4
0
1

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
32.  Reconciliation of profit after income tax to net cash inflow from operating activities

Profit for the period
Depreciation and amortisation including lease inducements
Interest income
Fair value adjustment to derivatives
Interest expense – unwind of borrowing costs
IPO and related expenses
Share-based payments expense
Profit on sale of financial asset
Net exchange differences
Defined benefits superannuation
Change in operating assets and liabilities
  Decrease (increase) in trade and other receivables
  Decrease (increase) in inventories
  Decrease (increase) in deferred tax asset

Increase (decrease) in trade and other payables
(Decrease) increase in current tax payable
(Decrease) increase in provisions
(Decrease) increase in other liabilities

Net cash inflow from operating activities

33.  Parent entity financial information

(a) Summary financial information
The individual financial statements for the parent entity show the following aggregate amounts:

Balance sheet
Current assets
Total assets
Current liabilities
Total liabilities
Shareholders’ equity
Issued capital
Reserves
  Cash flow hedges
  Other reserve
  Share-based payments
Retained earnings
profit for the period

total comprehensive income

Consolidated

2012 
52 weeks 
$’000

 141,067 
 88,124 
 (4,499)
 (3,505)
 1,717 
 – 
 1,955 
 – 
 66 
 – 

 7,158 
 (4,306)
 25,144 
 (21,010)
 (18,706)
 (31,080)
 (2,211)

2011 
52 weeks 
$’000

 159,665 
 79,443 
 (2,169)
 2,628 
 2,173 
 5,031 
 (1,410)
 (11,680)
 – 
 (319)

 1,582 
 (24,008)
 18,314 
 6,497 
 22,802 
 (27,278)
 (4,220)

 179,914 

 227,051 

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

 176,071 
 1,073,255 
 38,320 
 488,850 

 45,621 
 948,567 
 56,912 
 507,056 

 519,776 

 519,479 

 (1,785)
 (31,650)
 13,185 
 85,430 
 268,641 

 267,275 

 258 
 (31,650)
 11,230 
 (57,806)
 2,900 

 2,774 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

1
0
5

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
33.  Parent entity financial information  continued

(b) Guarantees entered into by the parent entity

Carrying amount included in current liabilities

2012 
$’000

 – 

 – 

2011 
$’000

 – 

 – 

The parent entity is the borrowing entity under the Group’s financing facilities. Under these facilities, the parent entity is party to a cross-
guarantee with various other Group entities, who guarantee the repayment of the facilities in the event that the parent entity is in default.

The parent entity is also party to a deed of cross guarantee entered into on 10 May 2010. The details of the deed of cross guarantee are set 
out in note 30. At balance date no liability has been recognised in relation to these guarantees on the basis that the potential exposure is not 
considered material.

The parent entity has issued bank guarantees amounting to $46.9 million, of which $31.9 million represents guarantees supporting workers’ 
compensation self insurance licences in various jurisdictions.

(c) Contingent liabilities of the parent entity
The parent entity did not have any contingent liabilities as at 28 July 2012 or 30 July 2011. For information about guarantees given by the parent 
entity, please see above.

(d) Contractual commitments for the acquisition of property, plant or equipment
The parent entity did not have any contractual commitments for the acquisition of property, plant or equipment as at 28 July 2012 or 30 July 2011. 

(e) Event subsequent to balance date
Subsequent to the end of the financial year, on 10 October 2012, the Company recorded a dividend from a subsidiary company of $133.8 million, 
representing payment of undistributed profits of subsidiaries of the current financial year.

34.  Earnings per share

(a) Basic earnings per share
  Total basic earnings per share attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the Company

(b) Diluted earnings per share
  Total diluted earnings per share attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the Company

(c) Reconciliations of earnings used in calculating earnings per share
Basic earnings per share
  Profit attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the Company used in calculating basic earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share
  Profit attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the Company used in calculating diluted earnings per share

(d) Weighted average number of shares used as the denominator
Weighted average number of ordinary shares used as the denominator in calculating basic earnings per share
  Adjustments for calculation of diluted earnings per share:
  Options

Weighted average number of ordinary shares and potential ordinary shares used as the denominator  
in calculating diluted earnings per share

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

6
0
1

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

2011 
$’000

23.9

23.7

27.4

27.3

 139,365 

 159,724 

 139,365 

 159,724 

Consolidated

2012 
Number

2011 
Number

 583,288,348 

 582,174,903 

 4,578,147 

 3,778,086 

 587,866,495 

 585,952,989 

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(e) Information concerning the classification of securities

(i) Options and performance rights
Options granted to employees under the Myer Equity Incentive Plan are considered to be potential ordinary shares and have been included 
in the determination of diluted earnings per share to the extent to which they are dilutive. The options have not been included in the 
determination of basic earnings per share. Details relating to the options are set out in note 35.

22,293,146 options outstanding at period end are not included in the calculation of diluted earnings per share because they are antidilutive for 
the period ended 28 July 2012. These options could potentially dilute basic earnings per share in the future.

35.  Share-based payments

(a) Myer Equity Incentive Plan
The Myer Equity Incentive Plan was established to help ensure retention of senior management and key staff (Snr Executive) and to provide 
incentives for the delivery of both short and long-term shareholder returns. Under the plan, options and rights have been issued in Myer 
Holdings Limited, the Group’s ultimate Australian parent, since November 2006 as follows: 

Tranche 1

Tranche 2

Tranche 3

Tranche 4

Tranche 5

Tranche 6  
– EPS Snr 
Executive Plan

Issued November – December 2006. Options were granted with time-based and performance-based components. Two-thirds 
of the options granted were to vest evenly over a five-year period provided the participant remained with the Group, with the 
other third vesting upon the achievement of certain EBITDA targets. Under the terms of the offer, as a result of the IPO, 80% of 
unvested options vested immediately on 6 November 2009, with the remainder vesting on the second anniversary of IPO with 
the exception of the CEO, whose remaining options under the tranche vested on the first anniversary of the IPO. This plan has 
now expired and any unexercised options lapsed.

Issued August 2007. Options were granted with time-based and performance-based components. Two-thirds of the options 
granted were to vest evenly over a four-year period provided the participant remained with the Group, with the other third 
vesting upon the achievement of certain EBITDA targets. Under the terms of the offer, as a result of the IPO, 80% of unvested 
options vested immediately on 6 November 2009, with the remainder vesting on the second anniversary of IPO. This plan has 
now expired and any unexercised options lapsed.

Issued January – July 2008: Options vest on a time basis evenly over the three-year period from 31 July 2010 to 31 July 2012.

Issued 17 December 2008: Options vest on a time basis over the three-year period from 31 July 2011 to 31 July 2013.

Issued 30 June 2009: Options vest on a time basis over the three-year period from 31 July 2012 to 31 July 2014.

Issued 6 November 2009: Options vest on an EPS performance basis over a three-year period from November 2009  
to 31 July 2012, subject to performance hurdles being met.

Tranche 6  
– EPS CEO Plan

Issued 6 November 2009: Options vest on an EPS performance basis over a four-year period from November 2009  
to 31 July 2013, subject to performance hurdles being met. 

Tranche 6  
– Share price 
CEO Plan

Performance 
rights TSR  
(Snr Executive)

Performance 
rights EPS  
(Snr Executive)

Performance 
rights TSR  
(CEO)

Performance 
rights EPS  
(CEO)

Issued 6 November 2009: Options vest on a share price performance basis over the four-year period from November 2009  
to 31 July 2013, the timing of which is subject to performance hurdles being met.

Issued October 2011: Management Total Shareholder Return performance rights vest depending on Myer’s performance 
against TSR hurdles over the performance period 31 July 2011 to 26 July 2014. Following the end of the performance period 
and after Myer has lodged its full year audited financial results for 2014 with the ASX, the Myer Board will test the performance 
hurdles and will determine how many performance rights (if any) are eligible to vest. 

Issued October 2011: Management Earnings Per Share performance rights will vest depending on Myer’s performance against 
the EPS hurdle over the performance period 31 July 2011 to 26 July 2014, with a linear progression through the various 
threshold points. Following the end of the performance period and after Myer has lodged its full year audited financial results 
for 2014 with the ASX, the Myer Board will test the performance hurdles and will determine how many performance rights  
(if any) are eligible to vest. 

Issued December 2011: CEO Total Shareholder Return performance rights vest depending on Myer’s performance against TSR 
hurdles over the performance period 31 July 2011 to 26 July 2014. Following the end of the performance period and after 
Myer has lodged its full year audited financial results for 2014 with the ASX, the Myer Board will test the performance hurdles 
and will determine how many performance rights (if any) are eligible to vest. 

Issued December 2011: CEO Earnings Per Share performance rights will vest depending on Myer’s performance against the 
EPS hurdle over the performance period 31 July 2011 to 26 July 2014, with a linear progression through the various threshold 
points. Following the end of the performance period and after Myer has lodged its full year audited financial results for 2014 
with the ASX, the Myer Board will test the performance hurdles and will determine how many performance rights (if any) are 
eligible to vest. 

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

1
0
7

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
35.  Share-based payments  continued

(a) Myer Equity Incentive Plan  continued
Options and rights are granted under the plan for no consideration, and carry no dividend or voting rights. When exercisable, each option 
or right is convertible into one ordinary share in the Company. Participation in the plan is at the Board’s discretion and no individual has a 
contractual right to participate in the plan or to receive any guaranteed benefits.

Set out below is a summary of options and rights granted under the plan:

Expiry  
date

Exercise  
price
$

Balance  
at start  
of period
number

Granted 
during the 
period
number

Exercised 
during the 
period
number

Lapsed  
during  
the period
number

Balance  
at end  
of period
number

Vested  
and  
exercisable  
at end  
of the  
period
number

15 oct 2011

0.01

 316,809 

15 oct 2011

1.27

 157,063 

21 Dec 2012

3.00

 7,440,580 

24 oct 2013

2.14

 3,705,863 

24 oct 2014

2.34

 4,153,900 

31 Dec 2012

4.10

 3,193,278 

31 Dec 2013

4.10

 5,152,671 

31 Dec 2013

5.74

 2,227,723 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

31 oct 2014

0.00

 – 

 2,182,073 

31 oct 2014

0.00

 – 

 1,411,330 

31 oct 2014

0.00

 – 

 1,250,000 

31 oct 2014

0.00

 – 

 808,383 

 (316,809)

 (157,063)

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 (1,219,400)

 6,221,180 

 3,979,675 

 (44,000)

 (645,200)

 3,016,663 

 448,600 

 – 

 (1,000,000)

 3,153,900 

 – 

 (672,269)

 2,521,009 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 5,152,671 

 – 

 2,227,723 

 (175,427)

 2,006,646 

 (113,472)

 1,297,858 

 – 

 1,250,000 

 – 

 808,383 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 26,347,887 

 5,651,786 

 (517,872)

 (3,825,768)

 27,656,033 

 4,428,275 

Grant date

Consolidated – 2012
Tranche 1: 
Nov – Dec 2006

Tranche 2: 
Aug – Nov 2007

Tranche 3: 
Jan – May 2008

Tranche 4: 
17 Dec 2008

Tranche 5: 
30 Jun 2009

Tranche 6:  
EPS Snr  
Executive Plan 
06 Nov 2009

Tranche 6:  
EPS CEO Plan 
06 Nov 2009

Tranche 6: Share 
Price CEO Plan 
06 Nov 2009

Performance rights 
TSR (Snr Executive)

Performance rights 
EPS (Snr Executive)

Performance rights 
TSR (CEO)

Performance rights 
EPS (CEO)

total

Weighted average exercise price

$3.31 

$0.00 

$0.57 

$2.65 

$2.78 

$2.91 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

8
0
1

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Expiry  
date

Exercise  
price
$

Balance  
at start  
of period
number

Granted 
during the 
period
number

Exercised 
during the 
period
number

Lapsed  
during  
the period
number

Balance  
at end  
of period
number

Vested  
and  
exercisable  
at end  
of the  
period
number

15 Oct 2011

0.01

 1,287,475 

15 Oct 2011

1.27

 365,341 

21 Dec 2012

3.00

 9,028,213 

24 Oct 2013

2.14

 4,302,863 

24 Oct 2014

2.34

 4,702,900 

31 Dec 2012

4.10

 3,445,379 

31 Dec 2013

4.10

 5,152,671 

31 Dec 2013

5.74

 2,227,723 

 30,512,565 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 (960,000)

 (10,666)

 316,809 

 – 

 (208,278)

 – 

 157,063 

 66,725 

 (692,333)

 (895,300)

 7,440,580 

 2,118,638 

 – 

 – 

 (597,000)

 3,705,863 

 (549,000)

 4,153,900 

 – 

 (252,101)

 3,193,278 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 5,152,671 

 – 

 2,227,723 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 – 

 (1,860,611)

 (2,304,067)

 26,347,887 

 2,185,363 

Grant date

Consolidated – 2011
Tranche 1: 
Nov – Dec 2006

Tranche 2: 
Aug – Nov 2007

Tranche 3: 
Jan – May 2008

Tranche 4: 
17 Dec 2008

Tranche 5: 
30 Jun 2009

Tranche 6: EPS  
Snr Executive Plan 
06 Nov 2009

Tranche 6: EPS  
CEO Plan 
06 Nov 2009

Tranche 6: Share 
Price CEO Plan 
06 Nov 2009

total

Weighted average exercise price

$3.14 

$0.00 

$1.26 

$2.73 

$3.31 

$2.95

No options expired during the periods covered by the above table. 

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise of options exercised during the period ended 28 July 2012 was $2.16 (2011: $3.60). 

The weighted average remaining contractual life of share options and rights outstanding at the end of the period was 1.4 years (2011: 2.1 years). 

Fair value of performance rights granted
The assessed fair value at grant date of options and rights granted during the period is noted below. Fair value varies depending on the period to 
vesting date. The fair values at grant dates were independently determined using a monte-carlo simulation pricing model that takes into account 
the exercise price, the term of the rights, the impact of dilution, the fair value of shares in the Company at grant date and expected volatility of 
the underlying share, the expected dividend yield and the risk-free interest rate for the term of the right.

The fair values and model inputs for performance rights granted during the period included:

a) Fair value of performance rights granted

b) Exercise price at grant date

c) Grant date

d) Expiry date

e) Share price at grant date

f ) Expected price volatility of the Group’s shares

g) Expected dividend yield

h) Risk-free interest rate

Performance 
 rights TSR  
Snr Executive

Performance  
rights EPS  
Snr Executive

Performance  
rights TSR  
(CEO)

Performance  
rights EPS  
(CEO)

$1.08

$0.00

$1.67

$0.00

21 Oct 2011

Oct 2014

21 Oct 2011

Oct 2014

$2.08

30%

7%

3.56%

$2.08

30%

7%

3.56%

$1.08

$0.00

9 Dec 2011

Oct 2014

$2.08

30%

7%

3.56%

$1.67

$0.00

9 Dec 2011

Oct 2014

$2.08

30%

7%

3.56%

The expected price volatility is based on the historic volatility (based on the remaining life of the performance rights), adjusted for any expected 
changes to future volatility due to publicly available information.

Where options or rights are issued to employees of subsidiaries within the Group, the subsidiaries compensate the Company for the amount 
recognised as expense in relation to these options or rights.

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

1
0
9

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
35.  Share-based payments  continued

(b) Expenses arising from share-based payment transactions
Total expenses arising from share-based payments transactions recognised during the period as part of employee benefit expense were  
as follows:

Options and rights issued under Myer Equity Incentive Plan

Consolidated

2012 
$’000

 1,955 

2011 
$’000

 (1,409)

Share-based payment transaction expenses represent the amount recognised in the period in relation to share-based remuneration plans.  
Where expectations of the number of options or rights expected to vest changes, the life to date expense is adjusted which can result in a 
negative expense for the period due to the reversal of amounts recognised in prior periods. 

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

0
1
1

Notes to the financial statements continued 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
DireCtorS’ DeClaration

In the directors’ opinion:

(a)  the financial statements and notes set out on pages 60 to 110 are in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001, including:

(i)  complying with Accounting Standards, the Corporations Regulations 2001 and other mandatory professional reporting requirements; and

(ii)  giving a true and fair view of the consolidated entity’s financial position as at 28 July 2012 and of its performance for the financial period 

ended on that date; and

(b)  there are reasonable grounds to believe that the Company will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable, and

(c)   at the date of this declaration, there are reasonable grounds to believe that the members of the extended closed group identified in note 30 

will be able to meet any obligations or liabilities to which they are, or may become, subject by virtue of the deed of cross guarantee described 
in note 30.

Note 1(a) confirms that the financial statements also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International 
Accounting Standards Board.

The directors have been given the declarations by the chief executive officer and chief financial officer required by section 295A of the 
Corporations Act 2001.

This declaration is made in accordance with a resolution of the directors.

Howard McDonald 
Chairman 
Melbourne 
10 October 2012

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

1
1
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
inDepenDent auDitor’S report

Report on the financial report 

Independent auditor’s report to the members of Myer Holdings Limited

Independent auditor’s report to the members of 
Myer Holdings Limited
Auditor’s opinion 
Report on the financial report
In our opinion: 
We have audited the accompanying financial report of Myer Holdings Limited (the company), which 
comprises the statement of financial position as at 28 July 2012, the statement of comprehensive 
We have audited the accompanying financial report of Myer Holdings Limited (the company), which comprises the 
income, statement of changes in equity and statement of cash flows for the period ended on that date, 
statement of financial position as at 28 July 2012, the statement of comprehensive income, statement of changes in 
a summary of significant accounting policies, other explanatory notes and the directors’ declaration for 
equity and statement of cash flows for the period ended on that date, a summary of significant accounting policies, 
Myer Holdings Limited and the Myer Group (the consolidated entity). The consolidated entity 
other explanatory notes and the directors’ declaration for Myer Holdings Limited and the Myer Group (the consolidated 
comprises the company and the entities it controlled at the  period’s end or from time to time during 
entity). The consolidated entity comprises the company and the entities it controlled at the period’s end or from time  
the financial period .
to time during the financial period.

(i) 

(a)

the financial report of Myer Holdings Limited is in accordance with the Corporations Act 
2001, including: 

giving a true and fair view of the consolidated entity’s financial position as at 28 July 
2012 and of its performance for the period ended on that date; and 

Directors’ responsibility for the financial report
(ii) 

Directors’ responsibility for the financial report 
The directors of the company are responsible for the preparation of the financial report that gives a 
true and fair view in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Act 2001
The directors of the company are responsible for the preparation of the financial report that gives a true and fair view  
and for such internal controls as the directors determine are necessary to enable the preparation of the 
in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Act 2001 and for such internal controls as the 
financial report that is free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. In Note 1, the 
directors determine are necessary to enable the preparation of the financial report that is free from material misstatement, 
directors also state, in accordance with Accounting Standard AASB 101 Presentation of Financial 
whether due to fraud or error. In Note 1, the directors also state, in accordance with Accounting Standard AASB 101 
Statements, that the financial statements comply with International Financial Reporting Standards.
Presentation of Financial Statements, that the financial statements comply with International Financial Reporting Standards.

complying with Australian Accounting Standards (including the Australian 
Accounting Interpretations) and the Corporations Regulations 2001; and

the financial report and notes also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards 
as disclosed in Note 1.

(b) 

Auditor’s responsibility 

Auditor’s responsibility
Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the financial report based on our audit. We conducted 
our audit in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. These Auditing Standards require that we 
Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the financial report based on our audit. We conducted our audit in 
comply with relevant ethical requirements relating to audit engagements and plan and perform the 
accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. These Auditing Standards require that we comply with relevant ethical 
audit to obtain reasonable assurance whether the financial report is free from material misstatement.
requirements relating to audit engagements and plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance whether 
the financial report is free from material misstatement.

Report on the Remuneration Report(13(a))
We have audited the remuneration report included in pages x to y of the directors’ report for the 
period ended 28 July 2012. The directors of the company are responsible for the preparation and 
presentation of the remuneration report in accordance with section 300A of the Corporations Act 
2001. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the remuneration report, based on our audit 
conducted in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. 

An audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures 
An audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial 
in the financial report. The procedures selected depend on the auditor’s judgement, including the 
report. The procedures selected depend on the auditor’s judgement, including the assessment of the risks of material 
assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the financial report, whether due to fraud or error. 
misstatement of the financial report, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, the auditor 
In making those risk assessments, the auditor considers internal control relevant to the entity’s 
considers internal control relevant to the entity’s preparation and fair presentation of the financial report in order to 
preparation and fair presentation of the financial report in order to design audit procedures that are 
design audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion  
appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness 
of the entity’s internal control. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting 
on the effectiveness of the entity’s internal control. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting 
policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates made by the directors, as well as 
policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates made by the directors, as well as evaluating the overall 
evaluating the overall presentation of the financial report.
presentation of the financial report.

Auditor’s opinion
In our opinion, the remuneration report of Myer Holdings Limited for the year ended 28 July 2012, 
complies with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001.

Our procedures include reading the other information in the Annual Report to determine whether it contains any 
material inconsistencies with the financial report.

Our procedures include reading the other information in the Annual Report to determine whether it 
contains any material inconsistencies with the financial report. 

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our  
audit opinion. 

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for 
our audit opinion. 

PricewaterhouseCoopers

Independence

In conducting our audit, we have complied with the independence requirements of the Corporations Act 2001.

Independence
In conducting our audit, we have complied with the independence requirements of the Corporations
Act 2001.

PricewaterhouseCoopers, ABN 52 780 433 757  
Freshwater Place, 2 Southbank Boulevard, SOUTHBANK  VIC  3006, GPO Box 1331, MELBOURNE  VIC  3001 
T: 61 3 8603 1000, F: 61 3 8603 1999, www.pwc.com.au  

Andrew Mill 
Partner

Melbourne 
xx September 2012

Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

2
1
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Auditor’s opinion

In our opinion:

Auditor’s opinion 
In our opinion: 
the financial report of Myer Holdings Limited is in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001, including:
(a)
(i)  giving a true and fair view of the consolidated entity’s financial position as at 28 July 2012 and of its 

the financial report of Myer Holdings Limited is in accordance with the Corporations Act 
2001, including: 

performance for the period ended on that date; and

(ii)  complying with Australian Accounting Standards (including the Australian Accounting Interpretations)  

(i) 

and the Corporations Regulations 2001; and

giving a true and fair view of the consolidated entity’s financial position as at 28 July 
2012 and of its performance for the period ended on that date; and 

the financial report and notes also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards as disclosed in Note 1.

(a)   

(b)  

Report on the Remuneration Report

(ii) 

complying with Australian Accounting Standards (including the Australian 
Accounting Interpretations) and the Corporations Regulations 2001; and

We have audited the remuneration report included in pages 44 to 59 of the directors’ report for the period ended  
28 July 2012. The directors of the company are responsible for the preparation and presentation of the remuneration 
report in accordance with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on  
the remuneration report, based on our audit conducted in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards.

the financial report and notes also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards 
as disclosed in Note 1.

(b) 

Auditor’s opinion

In our opinion, the remuneration report of Myer Holdings Limited for the year ended 28 July 2012, complies with 
section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001.

Report on the Remuneration Report(13(a))
We have audited the remuneration report included in pages x to y of the directors’ report for the 
period ended 28 July 2012. The directors of the company are responsible for the preparation and 
presentation of the remuneration report in accordance with section 300A of the Corporations Act 
2001. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the remuneration report, based on our audit 
conducted in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. 

pricewaterhouseCoopers

Auditor’s opinion
In our opinion, the remuneration report of Myer Holdings Limited for the year ended 28 July 2012, 
complies with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001.

Andrew Mill 
partner 

Melbourne 
10 october 2012

PricewaterhouseCoopers

Andrew Mill 
Partner

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

Melbourne 
xx September 2012

2
0
1
2

/

1
1
3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
auDitor’S inDepenDenCe DeClaration

As lead auditor for the audit of Myer Holdings Limited for the period ended 28 July 2012, I declare that to the  
best of my knowledge and belief, there have been:

Independent auditor’s report to the members of 
Myer Holdings Limited
Auditor’s opinion 
Auditor’s Independence Declaration 
Report on the financial report
In our opinion: 
We have audited the accompanying financial report of Myer Holdings Limited (the company), which 
comprises the statement of financial position as at 28 July 2012, the statement of comprehensive 
(a)
income, statement of changes in equity and statement of cash flows for the period ended on that date, 
 no contraventions of the auditor independence requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 in relation  
a summary of significant accounting policies, other explanatory notes and the directors’ declaration for 
to the audit; and
Myer Holdings Limited and the Myer Group (the consolidated entity). The consolidated entity 
comprises the company and the entities it controlled at the  period’s end or from time to time during 
the financial period .

This declaration is in respect of Myer Holdings Limited and the entities it controlled during the period.

no contraventions of any applicable code of professional conduct in relation to the audit.

(i) 

b)   

a)   

the financial report of Myer Holdings Limited is in accordance with the Corporations Act 
2001, including: 

giving a true and fair view of the consolidated entity’s financial position as at 28 July 
2012 and of its performance for the period ended on that date; and 

(ii) 

Directors’ responsibility for the financial report 
The directors of the company are responsible for the preparation of the financial report that gives a 
true and fair view in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Act 2001
and for such internal controls as the directors determine are necessary to enable the preparation of the 
financial report that is free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. In Note 1, the 
directors also state, in accordance with Accounting Standard AASB 101 Presentation of Financial 
Statements, that the financial statements comply with International Financial Reporting Standards.

complying with Australian Accounting Standards (including the Australian 
Accounting Interpretations) and the Corporations Regulations 2001; and

the financial report and notes also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards 
as disclosed in Note 1.

(b) 

Melbourne 
10 october 2012 

Andrew Mill 
partner 
pricewaterhouseCoopers

Auditor’s responsibility
Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the financial report based on our audit. We conducted 
our audit in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. These Auditing Standards require that we 
comply with relevant ethical requirements relating to audit engagements and plan and perform the 
audit to obtain reasonable assurance whether the financial report is free from material misstatement.

Report on the Remuneration Report(13(a))
We have audited the remuneration report included in pages x to y of the directors’ report for the 
period ended 28 July 2012. The directors of the company are responsible for the preparation and 
presentation of the remuneration report in accordance with section 300A of the Corporations Act 
2001. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the remuneration report, based on our audit 
conducted in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. 

An audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures 
in the financial report. The procedures selected depend on the auditor’s judgement, including the 
assessment of the risks of material misstatement of the financial report, whether due to fraud or error. 
In making those risk assessments, the auditor considers internal control relevant to the entity’s 
preparation and fair presentation of the financial report in order to design audit procedures that are 
appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness 
of the entity’s internal control. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting 
policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates made by the directors, as well as 
evaluating the overall presentation of the financial report.

Auditor’s opinion
In our opinion, the remuneration report of Myer Holdings Limited for the year ended 28 July 2012, 
complies with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001.

Our procedures include reading the other information in the Annual Report to determine whether it 
contains any material inconsistencies with the financial report. 

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for 
our audit opinion. 

PricewaterhouseCoopers

Independence
In conducting our audit, we have complied with the independence requirements of the Corporations
Act 2001.

PricewaterhouseCoopers, ABN 52 780 433 757  
Freshwater Place, 2 Southbank Boulevard, SOUTHBANK  VIC  3006, GPO Box 1331, MELBOURNE  VIC  3001 
T: 61 3 8603 1000, F: 61 3 8603 1999, www.pwc.com.au  

Andrew Mill 
Partner

Melbourne 
xx September 2012

Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

4
1
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ShareholDer inFormation

Shareholder information as at 1 October 2012
Myer Holdings Limited only has one class of shares on issue (being ordinary shares). All of the Company’s issued shares are listed on the 
Australian Securities Exchange. 

Issued capital
Number of shareholders
Minimum parcel price
Holders with less than a marketable parcel (less than 291 shares)

Distribution of shareholders and shareholdings

Number

583,384,551
54,326
$1.72 per unit
8,559 holders (1,494,898 total shares)

Total holders

Units

% of issued capital

Range

1 – 1,000
1,001 – 5,000
5,001 – 10,000
10,001 – 100,000
100,001 and over

total

27,445
20,103
3,604
3,005

169

54,326

Unmarketable parcels

Minimum $500.00 parcel at $1.72 per unit

291

Minimum parcel size

Twenty largest shareholders

Rank

Name

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

18
19
20

HSBC Custody Nominees (Australia) Limited
J P Morgan Nominees Australia Limited 
National Nominees Limited 
Citicorp Nominees Pty Limited 
Citicorp Nominees Pty Limited 
JP Morgan Nominees Australia Limited 
M F Custodians Ltd
BNP Paribas Noms Pty Ltd 
Bernard Joseph Brookes
AMP Life Limited 
BNP Paribas Noms Pty Ltd  
QIC Limited
HSBC Custody Nominees (Australia) Limited-GSCO ECA 
Bainpro Nominees Pty Limited
BNP Paribas Noms Pty Ltd 
Brookes Family Investments Pty Ltd 
HSBC Custody Nominees (Australia) Limited  

UBS Wealth Management Australia Nominees Pty Ltd
HSBC Custody Nominees (Australia) Limited – A/C 2
Mr Richard Willmot Chadwick + Mrs Gwenda Ann Chadwick
total top 20 shareholders of fully paid ordinary shares

total remaining holders balance

13,197,406
45,735,417
27,364,572
71,975,420

425,111,736 

583,384,551

Holders

8,559

2.26
7.84
4.69
12.34

72.87

100.00

Units

1,494,898

Units

% issued capital

104,275,986
88,626,165
69,949,816
36,755,079
16,466,548
12,692,924
11,560,483
10,569,166
6,225,782
4,347,194
4,043,726
3,053,304
2,800,273
1,700,000
1,588,556
1,500,000

1,432,371
1,418,055
1,370,010
1,335,000
381,710,438

201,674,113

17.87
15.19
11.99
6.30
2.82
2.18
1.98
1.81
 1.07
0.75
0.69
0.52
0.48
0.29
0.27
0.26

0.25
0.24
0.23
0.23
65.43

34.57

M
y
e
r

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
2

/

1
1
5

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Shareholder information continued

Substantial shareholder
As at 1 October 2012, there are three substantial shareholders that Myer is aware of: 

Name

Commonwealth Bank of Australia

Harris
UBS

Date of most recent notice 

Relevant interest

25 September 2012

11 April 2012
2 August 2012

40,001,332

35,222,064
34,807,776

Voting rights
Shareholders may vote at a meeting of shareholders in person, directly or by proxy, attorney or representative, depending on whether the 
shareholder is an individual or a company. Subject to any rights or restrictions attaching to shares, on a show of hands each shareholder present 
in person or by proxy, attorney or representative has one vote and, on a poll, has one vote for each fully paid share held. Presently, Myer has only 
one class of fully paid ordinary shares and these do not have any voting restrictions. If shares are not fully paid, on a poll the number of votes 
attaching to the shares is pro-rated accordingly. Options do not carry any voting rights.

2
1
0
2

t
r
o
p
e
r

l
A
u
n
n
A

r
e
y
M

/

6
1
1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
corporate Directory

Registered Office
Myer Holdings Limited 
Level 7 
800 Collins Street 
Docklands VIC 3008 
Phone: +61 (0) 3 8667 6000

Myer Support Office
800 Collins Street 
Docklands VIC 3008 
Phone: +61 (0) 3 8667 6800

Myer Postal Address
Myer Holdings Limited 
PO Box 869J 
Melbourne VIC 3001

Company Secretary
Marion Rodwell 
General Counsel and Company Secretary

Shareholder enquiries: 

Share Registry
Computershare Investor Services Pty Ltd 
Postal address 
GPO Box 2975 
Melbourne VIC 8060

Myer Shareholder Information Line
1300 820 260 (within Australia) 
+61 3 9415 4332 (outside Australia) 

www.investorcentre.com 

Investor Relations
Davina Gunn  
Investor Relations Manager 
Phone: +61 (0) 3 8667 7879 
Mobile: +61 (0) 400 896 809 
Email: myer.investor.relations@myer.com.au

Media Relations
Jo Lynch  
General Manager Corporate Affairs  
Phone: +61 (0) 3 8667 7571  
Mobile: +61 (0) 438 101 793  
Email: myer.corporate.affairs@myer.com.au

c r e a t e d   b y   d e s i g n a t e

Myer Customer Service Centre
PO Box 869J  
Melbourne VIC 3001  
Phone: 1800 811 611 (within Australia) or  
+61 3 8667 6000 (outside Australia) 
Fax: +61 (0) 3 8667 6091

Auditor
PricewaterhouseCoopers 
Level 19, Freshwater Place 
2 Southbank Boulevard 
Southbank VIC 3006

Securities Exchange Listing
Myer Holdings Limited (MYR) shares are listed on the Australian 
Securities Exchange (ASX).

Websites
www.myer.com.au 
www.myerone.com.au

About this Annual Report
The Myer Holdings Limited Annual Report is available online at 
www.myer.com.au/investor. Hard copies can be obtained by 
contacting our share registry.

Annual General Meeting 
The 2012 Annual General Meeting of Myer Holdings Limited will 
be held at Mural Hall, Level 6, Myer Melbourne, Bourke Street Mall, 
Melbourne, Victoria on Friday, 7 December 2012 at 11am.

m
y
e
r
.
c
o
m
a
u

.

s
h
o
p
o
n

l
i

n
e
a
t

s

h

o

p

m

y

e

r

.

c

o

m

.

a

u

o

n

l

i

n

e

a

t

 
 
 
 
www.myer.com.au